JP6558056B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies a lottery of a game when a game ball enters a start opening provided on a game board surface and notifies the lottery result. Executed in If the lottery result is a win, after a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the probability of being determined to be a win is a normal normal probability game state, and the probability of being determined to be a win is high. A gaming machine in which any one of the probabilistic gaming states is set has been proposed.

JP 2005-319221 A

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, it has been required to further improve the interest of the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further enhance the interest of the game in the above gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention can acquire the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and can acquire the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. acquisition means and the storage means and the first information acquired by the information acquisition means and the second information is stored, the first information stored in said storage means based on the establishment of the first condition And determining means for executing a second determination based on the second information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the second condition, and a first determination of the first determination by the determining means. Display control means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating one determination result and second identification information for indicating a second determination result of the second determination simultaneously on the display means, and display thereof The first identification dynamically displayed by the control means A first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period and it is possible to determine the respective of a plurality of dynamic display periods dynamic display period determining means of the second identification information of the broadcast, stored in the storage means For the first information or the second information that has been made, the dynamic display based on a prior determination unit that determines before the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and a determination result of the prior determination unit A prior period discriminating means for discriminating in advance the first dynamic display period or the second dynamic display period determined by the period determining means, and a high probability state in which the probability discriminated by the discriminating means is higher than normal And a probability setting means for setting one of a low probability state which is a normal probability lower than the high probability state, and the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means Based on information Has a demonstration execution means for executing output, and the probability setting unit, the setting a low probability state based on the first set condition is satisfied when a first discrimination result of the specific, The high probability state is set on the basis that the second setting condition is satisfied, and when the high probability state is set, the effect executed by the effect executing means is the prior determination means. When it is determined that the first setting condition is satisfied, a first effect is executed that can identify a remaining period until the first dynamic display period corresponding to the determined first information elapses. When it is determined by the prior determination means that the second setting condition is satisfied, the remaining period until the first dynamic display period corresponding to the determined first information can be identified The second performance is executed, and the play After the first dynamic display period corresponding to the first information determined that the second setting condition is established by the prior determination unit, the technical machine determines the remaining period executed in the second effect. The production to be increased is configured to be executable .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the information acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and acquiring the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; a storage means for the first information acquired by the information acquisition means and said second information is stored, the first determination by the first information stored in said storage means based on the establishment of the first condition A determination unit that executes the second determination based on the second information stored in the storage unit based on the establishment of the second condition, and shows a first determination result of the first determination by the determination unit a first identification information and the second second determination result second identification information and can be dynamically displayed simultaneously display means display control means for indicating a discrimination for dynamically by the display control means First dynamic display of the first identification information to be displayed A second dynamic display period and it is possible to determine the respective of a plurality of dynamic display periods dynamic display period determining means of the second identification information and between, the first information stored in said storage means or The second information is determined by the pre-determining means for determining before the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and the dynamic display period determining means based on the determination result of the pre-determining means. Prior period determination means for determining the first dynamic display period or the second dynamic display period in advance, and the probability determined by the determination means is higher than the normal state and higher probability state than the normal state Producing the effect based on the probability setting means for setting either the low probability state which is a low probability of the normal time and the information on the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means Production Has a line unit, wherein the probability setting unit sets the low probability state based on the first set condition is satisfied when a first discrimination result of the specific, the second setting condition The high probability state is set based on the establishment, and when the high probability state is set, the effect executed by the effect executing means is the first setting by the prior determination means. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, a first effect that can identify a remaining period until the first dynamic display period corresponding to the determined first information elapses is executed, and the prior determination When it is determined by the means that the second setting condition is satisfied, a second effect is performed that can identify a remaining period until the first dynamic display period corresponding to the determined first information elapses. And the gaming machine is After the first dynamic display period corresponding to the first information determined by the determining means that the second setting condition is satisfied, an effect of increasing the remaining period executed in the second effect can be executed. It is configured . Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the specific performance includes the low probability state and the high probability gaming state. Including an effect that suggests based on the first setting condition or the second setting condition that establishes which one is set. Thereby, an effect suggesting which of the low probability state and the high probability game state is set by the specific effect is displayed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 2, information for acquiring information based on establishment of the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition An acquisition unit, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the information acquisition unit until at least the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and the information stored in the storage unit. Pre-determining means for determining before the condition or the second condition is satisfied, and the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the determination result of the pre-determining means or Pre-period determining means for determining the second dynamic display period in advance, and the effect executed by the effect executing means is the first dynamic display determined by the prior period determining means. Period It is intended to include period information corresponding to. Thereby, the first dynamic display period can be determined in advance by the prior period determination unit, and the period information corresponding to the first dynamic display period can be executed by the effect execution unit. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the effect executed by the effect executing means is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. It includes the remaining period information that suggests the remaining period until it is set after moving to. Thereby, the remaining period information suggesting the remaining period until the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is set is executed by the effect execution means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability change game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability change game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time of the probability variation upper limit in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment, a special symbol reservation ball storage area, a special symbol reservation ball execution area, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area, and a normal symbol reservation ball execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the jackpot random number table in 1st Embodiment, (C) is the figure which showed typically the jackpot classification table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is the figure which showed typically the random number table per normal symbol in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 of MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 1st Embodiment, (b) is MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the addition time selection table 222b in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the rearrangement pending | holding storage area in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the secondary rearrangement pending | holding storage area in 1st Embodiment. . It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the pending | holding symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the pending | holding symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation monitoring process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud monitoring process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the probability change period alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is done. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the small hit random number table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic showing the small hit selection table in 2nd Embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (A), (b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change period alerting | reporting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the period setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 63, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol display (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball guide nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first start port 64, 2 The start port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first start port 64, the second start port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A normal symbol start port 67 is provided on the right side of the center of the game board 13. The normal symbol start port 67 is a gate type and includes a start port having a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing to the normal symbol start port 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “O” and “X” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  When it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display section 88 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is activated, and the normal electric accessory 640a, which is normally kept standing upright, is set in a counterclockwise direction from a state in which the ordinary electric accessory 640a stands substantially vertically. The angle (40 degrees in the present embodiment) is rotated, and the game ball is guided into the second start port 640 by the ordinary electric accessory 640a, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start port 640 (special State). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display section 88. At this time, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a is the number of spheres (holding spheres) whose variation display is not executed among the spheres won in the first starting port 64, the second starting port 640, and the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. The number of balls is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning at the first start port 64 has elapsed (in the present embodiment, the center segment of the seven segments blinks). After that, the display is stopped with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the win is displayed. The second lottery game is configured similarly to the first lottery game. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  Moreover, although the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  Furthermore, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, long reach 1-4 is set as a long-time fluctuation pattern. The long reach 1 to 4 is set as a variation pattern that can be selected when the determination result is out of the high probability state (probability variation) with respect to the first special symbol (special diagram 1). Has been.

  As will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information (for example, the number of long-time variation patterns performed before the start of variation) is also applicable.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning to the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, whether or not a big hit is determined (a big hit lottery) is determined, and the determination of the big hit type is also performed. Do. As the jackpot type determined here, two types of jackpot A (15R jackpot) and jackpot B (14R jackpot) are set as the jackpot type of the first special symbol. In addition, one type of jackpot C (15R jackpot) is set as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10C).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as winning devices that are activated in the open state during the big hit game. The first variable winning device 65 is operated so that the first specific winning port 65a is opened for the 1R (round) to 14R of jackpots A to C. Further, the second variable winning device 650 is operated so that the second specific winning port 650a is opened at 15R of jackpot A and jackpot C.

  In the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot is controlled so as to shift to the high probability state (probability change state) by winning the second specific winning port 650a in the jackpot game. That is, in the big hit B, the second variable winning device 640 is not operated, so that the high probability state is not shifted. The jackpot A and jackpot C are jackpots that can be shifted to a high probability state.

  Further, when the winning / failing determination result that has been executed based on winning the first start opening 64 is a big hit, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a tandem manner. It is reported that it was a big hit. However, from the third symbol, it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, and the player can see the jackpot being executed while playing the jackpot game. A game is played in the hope that it will be a big hit A. Then, from the 14th round, when the second variable prize winning device 650 is activated and the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened by moving to the next round, the player is that the jackpot type is jackpot A Can be played, and a game ball can be made to enter the second specific winning opening 650a to shift to a high probability state after a big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot type, it is determined whether or not to give the player a state that can be shifted to the high probability state. Then, the player can play the game so as to decide to shift to the high probability state by allowing the player to win the game ball to the second specific winning port 650a. Therefore, a fresh game can be provided to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 79 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a third symbol (first symbol) in synchronism with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a winning (start prize) at the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is provided.

  The 3rd symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 to be described later, as shown in FIG. One display area Dm indicates one of the third symbols, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the gaming state), left (left display region Dm1), middle (middle display region Dm2) and right (right side) Three symbol rows in the display area Dm3) are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

  Note that the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end.

  Specifically, the first display area Dm displays three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the main symbol numbers are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3, the main symbol numbers appear in ascending order. On the other hand, the second special symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol, and the symbol rows R1, R2, and R3 are displayed, and the variable display is similarly performed.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  A second display area Dn is formed at the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the gaming state) is displayed. In the second display area Dn, two types of symbol rows “O” and “X” as shown in FIG. 4B are displayed in parallel, and two “O” symbols are displayed on the left and right sides. When displayed in the column, the player is informed that the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been won.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal gaming state), the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display region Dm, and the second display region Dn. A third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation gaming state) or a short-time gaming state, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Then, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the display area is based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol being displayed in the state that was displayed before the jackpot game was started, and the gaming state being switched after the jackpot game. Is switched.

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area. In the sub display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 4B, a reserved symbol “black circle” corresponding to the first special symbol and a reserved symbol “black triangle” corresponding to the second special symbol are respectively displayed. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, so that four reserved symbols “black circles” are reserved in the secondary table display area Ds. A maximum of four symbols “black triangles” are displayed. As will be described in detail later, the reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds are displayed in the order of change starting from the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, display contents during probability change (during probability change gaming state) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the third symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the probability change. When the game state shifts to the probability variation gaming state, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display region Dm (see FIG. 4A), and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display region. Dn is displayed. Then, in the first display area Dm, a letter “not until the end of probability change ...” is displayed to notify the shortest time until the probability change gaming state ends, and the shortest remaining time until the probability change end is displayed below that. Digitally displayed numerically in the order of minutes, seconds, and milliseconds.

  Here, the shortest time until the end of the probability change is determined by lottery within the time determined by determining the time until the big hit B is started with the first special symbol. In addition, it has not yet been determined that the jackpot B will be started with the first special symbol (determined that the winner of the jackpot B is not set in the lottery of the first special symbol held during the change) In the state, the shortest time is set within the time until the variation of the first special symbol, which is the last variation start order of the stored first special symbol, ends. Furthermore, when there is no first special symbol that is changing and there is no lottery for the first special symbol that is on hold, the shortest variation time of the first special symbol (3 seconds in this embodiment) is set. .

  Thus, the probability variation gaming state is configured to continue for the player until the big hit B is started with the first special symbol, but the player can be notified of the remaining time of the probability variation gaming state. Therefore, the player can feel as if the period of the probability variation gaming state is set by time, and let the jackpot A or jackpot C win before the time elapses and continue the probability variation state. You can play games with the expectation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 5 (a), the first special symbol being fluctuated and the first special symbol held and stored are all out of the determination result, and the first special symbol with the latest variation start order The time until the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the symbol holding ball is 10 minutes 9 seconds 05 milliseconds or more is shown as an example.

  Next, FIG. 5B shows an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a game ball enters the first starting port 64 from the state shown in FIG. It is the shown schematic diagram. The reserved symbol “black circle” of the first special symbol is displayed by increasing by one. Here, the newly stored reserved ball of the first special symbol is selected as the variation type counter CS1 in which the determination result is unacceptable and the variation pattern of the deviating (5 s) is selected. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 5 (b), the time until the variation of the first special symbol that is currently established ends is added by 5 seconds. Then, when the extra opportunity (in this embodiment, established by winning the first start port 64) is established, 5 seconds is determined by an addition lottery (see FIG. 16) of the notification time described later, and the notification time is reached. The characters “5 second extension !!” indicating that 5 seconds have been added are displayed, and the time when 5 seconds have been added is also displayed on the digital counter.

  Next, referring to FIG. 6B, during the probability change, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol holding ball is stored, and the fluctuation of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the state which is a state. In the configuration of the present embodiment, if the variation (lottery) is not started with the first special symbol, the jackpot B, which is the end trigger of the probability variation gaming state, will not be won, so the probability variation gaming state will continue substantially. It becomes a state. However, since the player is informed that the probability variation gaming state is time-controlled and ends when a predetermined period elapses, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed. When the state is reached, the subtraction of the digital counter that is informing until the end of the probability change is stopped, and the characters “Timer is stopped !!” indicating that the subtraction is stopped are displayed.

  Thereby, the player can take a break with peace of mind even when the game is interrupted and the user wants to take a break such as a toilet. In this embodiment, the digital counter is set to stop when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is being changed. If there is no jackpot A or jackpot B among those stored on hold, the subtraction of the digital counter may be stopped based on the fact that the variation of the second special symbol has stopped. In the present embodiment, the player plays a game paying attention to the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Since the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn having a small display area, it is difficult for the player to notice the change display, and the player can play the game without paying attention to the change. Yes. Therefore, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot B, the player can hardly notice that the probability variation game is ended.

  In such a configuration, the player pays attention only to the 3rd symbol corresponding to the 2nd special symbol, and thus the player performs the game. Even if the special symbol fluctuates, he recognizes that he has no interest and can take a break to interrupt the game. Here, if the subtraction of the digital counter stops, the player interrupts the game with peace of mind. On the other hand, if the change of the second special symbol is stopped and the subtraction of the digital counter does not stop despite the state where there is no holding ball, the player confirms that the period of the probability variation game has been subtracted. Recognize and continue the game without interruption. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game can be interrupted such as a break.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot B is won with the first special symbol and the probability variation game is ended will be described. In FIG. 6B, the symbol combination “◯” indicating that the jackpot B is won with the first special symbol and the jackpot is won is displayed in the second display area Dn in parallel. After the jackpot B is executed, the game state is shifted to the normal game state. Therefore, the firing handle 51 is operated so that the game ball is fired with the strength to flow the game ball to the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the probability variation game state. The game is played in the state where the launch handle 51 is operated (left-handed game) so that the game ball is fired with the strength of flowing down the game ball to the left side of the variable display unit 80 from the right (right-handed game) state (left-handed game). The message “Please return to left-handed” is displayed to inform the player to do so.

  In addition, the remaining time of the digital counter is displayed as 0, and the characters “probability change end!” Indicating that the probability change game state has ended are displayed. In this case, when the jackpot B ends, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. It is done.

  Next, a calculation method when determining the remaining maximum period of the probability variation game period in the probability variation game state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 7, three reserved balls of the first special symbol are established, and during the change, the change pattern of falling off the reserved balls 1 to 2 is selected. Shows a state in which it is determined that the big hit B is won. In this case, when the change of the holding ball 3 is ended, the probability variation gaming state is ended, so the maximum period until the probability change end time is a time until the hold 3 is changed and ended. Therefore, the sum of the remaining fluctuation time during the fluctuation and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the suspensions 1 to 3 is determined as the maximum period until the end of the probability change. When the end of probability change is determined, the period is set in the digital counter (the difference time is added to the displayed period and displayed).

  In the present embodiment, the winning at the first start port 64 or the second start port 640 is suspended up to four times each. If a game ball wins at the first start port 64 while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the display area of the reserved symbol display area in the lower display area Ds Among the areas where no reserved symbols are displayed, a black symbol, which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game, is displayed in the lowest-numbered reserved symbol display area (the reserved symbol display area on the left side).

  In addition, when a game ball wins the second start opening 640 while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the “black triangle mark”, which is the holding symbol for the second lottery game, is the same as when the first start opening 640 is won. Is displayed in the reserved symbol display area of the lower display area Ds.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or four or more lottery games and corresponding start Of course, each mouth may be provided so that the lottery results can be displayed at the same time.

  When a game ball wins the first start port 64 and the second start port 640, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first start port 64 and the second start port 640 are also one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won.

  If either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, if the other special symbol is variably displayed, the measurement of the variation time is interrupted during the jackpot period. However, the variable display is continued. After that, when the jackpot game ends, the measurement of the fluctuation time is resumed and the fluctuation display is executed in the remaining fluctuation period.

  In this embodiment, when either of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, the measurement of the variation time is interrupted and the variation display is continued. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the fluctuation display during fluctuation is temporarily stopped and the remaining fluctuation time is variably displayed after the end of the jackpot.

  In addition, during interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined display manner “for example, alphabet h” in a predetermined cycle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

  On the lower right side of the game area, a horizontally-long rectangular first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 having a lateral width shorter than that of the first variable winning device 65 are arranged. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery regarding the big win of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 becomes a big win, the first win is set so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed. The symbol display device 37 is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the corresponding display area (first display region Dm or second display region Dn) of the third symbol display device 81, so that the jackpot is generated. Indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). The

  The first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning port 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The order (opening round) in which the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650a are opened and closed is determined according to the determined jackpot type. For example, in the case of jackpot A and jackpot C, the first specific prize opening 65a is opened from the first round to the fourteenth round, and the second specific prize opening 650a is opened in the fifteenth round. In the big hit B, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened from the first round to the fourteenth round, and the second variable winning device 650a is not opened.

  In this way, in the jackpot game, the special winning opening that is opened to the jackpot type is changed, so that the jackpot type can be determined by whether or not the second specific winning slot 65a is opened. Therefore, even if the player is not notified of the jackpot type with a symbol or the like, the player can be made to recognize the jackpot type at the specific winning opening that is opened.

  Further, the second specific winning opening 650a is configured as a winning opening that becomes an opportunity for the player to be determined to be given a probable gaming state after the big hit game. Based on the game ball entering the second specific winning port 650a, the probability variation game state is set after the big hit game. In addition, when a game ball enters each of the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a, 15 game balls are used as winning balls for one game ball. It is configured to be paid out by the player.

  Specifically, when the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is winning, the opening / closing operation is performed based on the jackpot type. It is set, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have won). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 has a first specific winning opening 65a and the second variable winning device 650 has a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a and the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing is provided on the side. Normally, the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a are in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the event of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downwards in the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. The operation is performed so that the open state and the normally closed state are repeated alternately.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any winning opening 63 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About configuration>
A characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a first start port 64 (also referred to as a left first start port 64) is provided below the variable display unit 80. The left first starting port 64 has an opening on the upper surface that is large enough to allow one game ball to enter, and a nail is located slightly opposite the diameter of the two game balls at a position opposite the opening. Widely spaced. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the winning rate of game play to the left first start port 64 (for example, the number of game balls to be won to the left first start port 64 when 250 game balls are fired) The ratio) can be varied.

  Further, in the right region of the variable display unit 80, a second start port 640 and a first start port 64 (also referred to as a right first start port 64) are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction. The second start port 640 has an opening through which a game ball can enter one side of the decorative member attached to the game board 60. On the front side (opposite surface) of the opening, an ordinary electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 is disposed. The ordinary electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls, and is pivotally supported at one end so as to be rotatable. Then, based on the winning of the second symbol, the game ball between a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once or twice) and a predetermined number of seconds (in this embodiment, 0.5 second or 1 second). Is rotated at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in the present embodiment) in a direction in which it can be guided to the second start port 640 (a direction away from the opening). The ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In normal times (other than when the second symbol is hit), the opening of the second starting port 640a is kept closed (upright state).

  Further, the right first start port 64 is disposed below the second start port 640 as shown in FIG. When the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in an open state (a state inclined to the horizontal direction), the ordinary electric accessory 640a is disposed at a position facing the opening of the right first starting port 64. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right first start port 64 when the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in an open state.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state) and a short-time gaming state, the probability that the second symbol is determined to be win is increased. When the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the player fires the gaming ball so that the gaming ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and wins the gaming ball at the left first starting port 64. The game is executed as if And since the probability that it is determined that the second symbol is a win increases when the 3rd symbol is won and the game shifts to the probability variation game or the short-time game, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol is likely to win. Has been. Thus, the player launches the game ball so as to pass the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game) and executes the game. In this case, since the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in an open state increases, it is configured to easily win the second start port 640, while the win to the right first start port 64 decreases.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, it is configured that the player who wins with the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, 50% of the jackpots are jackpots that are likely to be given a probability change after the jackpot game, and the remaining 50% are likely to be given a short-time game (low probability game state) after the jackpot game ( (It is difficult to give a probability change game) It is configured to receive a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the second special symbol is configured so that a jackpot that is likely to be given a probable game after a jackpot game is given at 100% when the jackpot is won. In other words, it is configured that the player who wins the second special symbol is more likely to be given the probable gaming state.

  As will be described in detail later, when a game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a that is opened and closed during the jackpot game, a probability variation game is awarded. The above-mentioned jackpot that is likely to give a certain probability refers to a jackpot where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the jackpot game and a game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Even when the jackpot that opens the second specific prize opening 650a is selected, it is possible to set a state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a state in which it is difficult to enter the second specific prize opening 650a. Good. For example, by providing a meandering path between the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, game balls that have not entered the first specific winning opening 65a flow down to the second specific winning opening 650a. It is assumed that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is required to do this. Then, by changing the time (so-called interval time) from when the first specific winning port 65a is closed until the second specific winning port 650a is opened, the second specific winning port 650a is changed from the first specific winning port 65a. What is necessary is just to set the case where the opening / closing operation | movement of the 2nd specific prize-winning port 650a is complete | finished within the predetermined time (for example, 5 second) required for flowing down.

  Further, the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is such that when the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the interval between the tip of the ordinary electric accessory 640a and the variable display unit 80 is one or more game balls and less than two balls. It is an interval. The through gates 67 are arranged so that the game balls flowing down the space can easily pass through the through gates 67 having gate-type openings. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to be difficult to win the right first starting port 64 by a nail disposed on the downstream side of the through gate 67. Specifically, on the outlet side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, the game ball flows down to the opening side of the right first starting port 64 by a nail disposed at the upper part of the opening portion of the right first starting port 64. It is comprised by the space | interval (less than 1 game ball) which does not, and it is comprised so that it may flow down through a windmill as it is. That is, when winning the right first starting port 64, it is configured to be limited to the case where the ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in a closed state (a standing state in the vertical direction).

  Further, during the probability variation state, the variation time of the second symbol is set to be as short as 3 seconds, and the ordinary electric accessory 640a is frequently opened. Therefore, it is configured such that it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right first starting port 640a during the probability change state. Therefore, when the probability variation state is reached, the number of times the probability variation state continues can be increased. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 640a is opened, the right first start port 64 is not won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The interval may be configured such that a winning can be made to the mouth 64, and the ratio may be reduced so that a winning can be made to the right first starting port 64.

  In addition, a first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 are disposed directly below the lower right side of the game area. The first variable winning device 65 is normally configured by closing a first specific winning opening 65a, which is a horizontally long opening through which a game ball can enter, by a door member that prevents the game ball from entering. Yes. When the special symbol is a big hit, the door member rotates to the position perpendicular to the game board 60 with the lower ends as rotation axes, and the flowing game balls are received by the door member, It is comprised so that it may guide to the inside of the 1st specific prize opening 65a.

  Further, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged so that the second specific winning port 650a, which is an opening having a narrower width than the first variable winning device, is a door member and restricts the game ball from entering normally. Has been. When the special symbol is a big hit, the door member is configured to rotate to a position perpendicular to the game board 60 with the lower ends as rotation axes, and to receive a game ball flowing down. In addition, it is determined that the probability change state is set after the big hit game by winning the game ball in the second specific winning port 650a.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot A that is awarded when the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a jackpot and the jackpot C that is awarded when the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is a jackpot. Are executed, the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1R (round) to the 14th round, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated only in the 15th round.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot B given when the first special symbol is a jackpot, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 can be operated from the 1R to the 14R. Therefore, there is no opportunity to win the second specific winning opening 650a, and it is difficult to give a probability variation state.

  In the present embodiment, the probability variation state is given when the game ball enters the second specific winning port 650a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that a jackpot may generate | occur | produce based on a game ball having entered into the 2nd specific prize opening 650a. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery result is a small win, the second specific prize opening 650a is opened and closed, and a game ball enters the second specific prize opening 650a. The 1 specific winning opening 65a is configured to open and close (a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine may be used).

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability game state, it is prohibited to play a right-handed game, and when a game ball wins the second starting port 640 in the low probability game state, an abnormal process is executed and the third A warning display “Please play with left-handed” is displayed on the symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is also notified by voice. Further, in a low-probability gaming state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal is output to a hall computer or the like. May be.

<Electric Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 9) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 88, and the like. Used in.

  The jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a special symbol random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. A variation type counter C3 used for selecting a variation pattern and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 are used. In addition, the normal winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display unit 88), and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1250) (see FIG. 41). It is updated periodically and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning for the first starting port 64 and the winning for the second starting port 640. The second special symbol holding ball storage 203b is provided. In the present embodiment, the first start port 64 and the second start port 640 are each provided with a maximum of four hold balls, and a total of a maximum of eight hold balls can be stored. For this reason, when the game ball is won during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins the second starting port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, and various settings for variably displaying the first special symbol (dynamic display). And control processing is executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d, and various settings and control processes for variably displaying the second special symbol storage area 203d Is executed.

  On the other hand, during a period when the special symbol lottery is not possible, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the big hit game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, When winning at the second starting port 640, if the number of reserves for the winning starting port is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired, and the winning starting port Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, when the number of reserves for the winning start opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and five prize balls (in this example, five game balls). Only) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first start port 64 and the second start port 640. However, the upper limit value is not limited thereto, and may be four or upper limit values. You may not make it.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). The configuration is back. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1. The special hit random number counter C1 is acquired in common for the first start port 64 and the second start port 640.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1250) (see FIG. 41).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins the first start port 64 or the second start port 640 (start win). At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start opening of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a (FIG. 10B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set by the big hit random number table 202a. If the value of the random number that is a big jackpot (in this embodiment, “7” when the probability is low, “0-9” when the probability is high), the jackpot is determined.

  The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special hit random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hit values) that are jackpots is 1 when the probability is low, the value “7” is 10 when the probability is high, and the value “0-9” is the jackpot It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in this embodiment). After reaching the value, it returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first start port 64 or the second start port 640 (start win). At the same timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning start opening.

  Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that falls off. For example, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the variable display effect The type will be that of the jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 10A, the ROM 202 stores various tables. FIG. 10B schematically shows an example of the jackpot random number table 202a, and FIG. 10C schematically shows an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the special jackpot type counter C2.

  As described above, the jackpot type A and jackpot B are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the first special symbol, and the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type dedicated to the second special symbol as described above. The jackpot A is a jackpot made up of 15R (round), and the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1R to 14R, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated at the 15R. Here, when the second variable winning device 650 is activated (opened) so that a game ball can enter the second specific winning port 650a, and the game ball enters the second specific winning port 650a, a big hit A The game state after the jackpot game is finished is set to the probability change state. Accordingly, the jackpot A is a jackpot type that can be given a probability variation game. The jackpot A is determined based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first start port 64, and when the jackpot is a big hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired (the first start port) Is a jackpot type determined to be one of 0-49.

  The jackpot B is a jackpot type constituted by 14R, and the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1R to 14R to execute the jackpot game. Therefore, since the second variable winning device 650 is not operated, the probability variation state is not set after the big hit B ends. As a result, the jackpot B is a jackpot type to which a probability variation state is not given. The jackpot B is determined based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first start port 64, and when the jackpot is a big hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired (the first start port) Is a jackpot type determined to be one of 50-99.

  The jackpot C is a jackpot of 15R, like the jackpot A, the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1R to 14R, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated from the 15R. As a result, the jackpot C is a jackpot type for which a probability variation state can be set after the jackpot game. The jackpot C is determined based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second start port 640, and when the jackpot is a big hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired (the first start port) Is a jackpot type determined to be any one of 0 to 99). That is, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when a big win is made, the big win C is always determined and executed.

  As described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the fact that the player has entered the first starting port 64, if the jackpot is reached, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are selected with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on entering the second starting port 64, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 100%. Therefore, the lottery in which the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player than the first special symbol is executed. As a result, the player feels that it is more advantageous that the lottery is executed with the second special symbol than the first special symbol, so that the player is expected to win a lottery with the second special symbol. Can do.

  As described above, in the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10C), the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 10C, the special hit type counter C2 value “0 to 49” is associated with the big hit A, and the special hit type counter C2 value “50 to 99” is associated with the big hit B. The special hit type counter C2 value “0 to 99” is associated with the big hit C.

  When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a big hit, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d in which the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored. The jackpot type associated with the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 stored in is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “20”, the big hit A is determined for the first special symbol, and the big hit C is determined for the second special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description of the various counters will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0.

  The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins (starts winning) at the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640. At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  FIGS. 11A to 11B show a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is a schematic diagram. A variation pattern selected in the normal gaming state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described.

  FIG. 11A shows a variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the determination result is wrong. This is a deviation (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d, each variation pattern type is assigned corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, with respect to the value “0 to 100” of the variation type counter CS1, it is configured with a variation time of 5 seconds (the third symbol is not displayed in the reach display mode but stopped in the display mode in which the third symbol is out). Display pattern) is set. For “101 to 160”, a variation pattern of normal reach configured with a variation time of 10 seconds is set. For “161 to 198”, a super reach variation pattern configured with a variation time of 30 seconds is set. Note that the variation pattern selected here is a variation pattern in which the determination result is wrong.

  As described above, when the game state is the normal game state and the result of the determination is not good, the variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (5 seconds) is selected at a rate of about 50%. Is done. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is bored early because the variation pattern of the long variation time is selected and the game is delayed even though the determination result is wrong. Further, by making the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol common, the variation between the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be performed equally.

  FIG. 11B is a common (normal) variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the determination result is a win. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the selection table 202d typically. In the hit (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern of normal reach composed of a variation time of 10 seconds is set for the value “0 to 10” of the variation type counter CS1. For “11-150”, a variation pattern of super reach configured with a variation time of 30 seconds is set. A variation pattern composed of a variation pattern of 60 seconds is set for “151 to 198”.

  Next, referring to FIG. 11 (c) to FIG. 12 (b), when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the variation pattern selection of the variation pattern selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected. The table 202d will be described. As the variation pattern selection table 202d in which variation patterns to be selected in the short-time gaming state are set, a common (short-time) variation pattern selection to be referred to when the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is win Table 202d (FIG. 11 (c)) and the first special symbol lottery result is referred to when the off (short) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 12 (a)) and the second special symbol An off (short time) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 12B), which is referred to when the lottery result is out, is set.

  FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (short time) common variation pattern selection table 202d. The winning (short time) common variation pattern selection table 202d is a variation pattern selection table that is selected when the determination result of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the short time gaming state is a win. In the hit (short time) common variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern of normal reach configured with a variation time of 5 seconds is set for the value “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the gaming state is the short-time state, the normal reach variation pattern that wins both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected if the determination result is a win. As a result, when the winning / failing determination result is won in the short-time gaming state, the variation pattern of the normal reach, which is a variation pattern of a relatively short variation time (5 seconds), is selected. You can shift to a big hit game. Here, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the variation display in which the determination result is a big hit in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started, the variation starts later. The special symbol to be controlled is controlled so as to forcibly determine whether or not it is missed. Therefore, when the determination result is a big hit, it is possible to prevent the game from being unnecessarily prolonged by selecting a relatively short variation time.

  In the present embodiment, the first and second special symbols are configured so that the variation display that is a big hit does not fluctuate at the same time. In the case of the configuration, the variation display time that is a big hit of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the first special symbol The variation time that becomes the big hit of the symbol may be configured such that a variation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol that may determine the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, the second special in the meantime The jackpot C can be awarded to the player by winning the jackpot with a symbol. In this case, a configuration is conceivable in which, when a big win is started with one special symbol, the lottery game that is fluctuating with the other special symbol is invalidated. By configuring in this way, it is determined immediately after the jackpot C, which is a disadvantageous jackpot type for the player, and the probability variation gaming state is set, and the probability variation gaming state ends in a short period of time. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the above-described configuration in which the variable display with the success / failure determination result being the big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, the determination result of the first special symbol is a fluctuation that is out of place. By setting the display time to be long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the variation time for the success / failure determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be displayed during the short-time game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed) can be reduced, and the number of lotteries with the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In addition, when the number of time reductions is until the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed 100 times, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 100 times continuously with the second special symbol coming off and changing. The number of times that the second special symbol is variably displayed during the short-time game can be effectively reduced by configuring the time longer than the time when variably displayed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 12 (a), it is one of the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern to be selected when the first special symbol determination result in the short-time gaming state is out of place is set. The outlier (short time) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the off (shortening) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. This out (short) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d includes a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds, a variation pattern of normal reach with a variation time of 10 seconds, and a variation time. A special reach variation pattern composed of 30 seconds and a semi-long variation pattern composed of 300 seconds are assigned with a value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, a deviation pattern is set for the fluctuation type counter CS1 of “0-50”, and a normal reach fluctuation pattern is set for “51-100”. , “101-169” has a special reach variation pattern, and “170-198” has a semi-long variation pattern.

  Here, in the short-time gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set high until the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100, and the open time of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is long. (Normally 0.2 seconds is extended to 1 second), and the number of times of opening is set to be large (normal time is twice). As a result, the player can variably display as many times as possible with the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player (a jackpot C that can be given a probable game state when a jackpot is determined). Expect to play games. Therefore, the special reach and semi-long variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is selected in the deviation (short time) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d than the deviation (short time) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d described later. It is set easily.

  Therefore, the chance of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol having a long variation time increases, and the number of times the first special symbol is varied in the short-time gaming state can be reduced. Therefore, when a big hit is made during the short-time gaming state, the big hit C can be easily given to the player.

  The semi-long variation pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol continues to fluctuate at a high speed for 300 seconds and then comes off. In addition, the second special symbol to be described later is configured to easily select a deviating variation pattern composed of a variation time of 5 seconds if the result of the determination is wrong during the time reduction. 60 variations can be started with a special symbol. Therefore, the variation (lottery) with the second special symbol can be performed during a shorter time game.

  In the present embodiment, the semi-long variation time is set to 300 seconds. However, the second special symbol may be configured to have a variation time in which the second special symbol can vary by a maximum of the number of time reductions at the maximum. Further, apart from the semi-long, a longer fluctuation time variation pattern may be set.

  Next, referring to FIG. 12 (b), a variation pattern that is selected when the determination result of the second special symbol in the short-time gaming state is out of range is set. The table 202d will be described. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this out-of-band (short time) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 12 (b), in the short-time gaming state, the second special symbol out-of-range variation pattern is composed of the out-of-sequence variation pattern composed of the variation time of 5 seconds and the variation time of 10 seconds. The normal reach variation pattern is set. “0-180” is set as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the outlier fluctuation pattern, and “181-198” is set as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach. Is set.

  As a result, in the short-time gaming state, an outlier variation pattern with a probability of 181/199 is selected if the determination result of the second special symbol is out of place. Therefore, since the variation of the second special symbol can be executed in a short time, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed more. Therefore, it is possible to give more advantageous lottery opportunities to the player using the short-time gaming state.

  Next, a variation pattern selection table for selecting variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 (c) to 13 (c).

  FIG. 12 (c) shows a deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table as a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a fluctuation pattern in the case where the determination result of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is deviation. 202d. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d, the variation pattern of the variation with the variation time of 5 seconds, the variation pattern of the long reach 1 with the variation time of 30 seconds, and the variation time Is a variation pattern of long reach 2 configured with 100 seconds, a variation pattern of long reach 3 configured with a variation time of 500 seconds, and a variation pattern of long reach 4 configured with a variation time of 1000 seconds. Are set in correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to “0 to 10”, and the fluctuation pattern of the long reach 1 is set to “11 to 120”. The long reach 2 variation pattern is set for “121 to 149”, the long reach 3 variation pattern is set for “150 to 189”, and the “190 to 198” variation is set. A long reach 4 variation pattern is set.

  As described above, the deviation (probability) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is set so that a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is selected at a rate of 188/199. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (30 seconds or more) is easily selected for variation display of the first special symbol, and the number of variations of the first special symbol is reduced. In addition, as will be described later, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time when the result of determining whether the second special symbol is right or wrong is set so that the variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected at a ratio of 151/199. The variation time is set to be extremely short compared to the first special symbol.

  Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, the number of changes of the second special symbol is larger than that of the first special symbol. Further, in the second start opening 640 that triggers the start of variation (lottery execution) of the second special symbol, in the probability variation gaming state, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily set so that the game ball is first It is configured to be easier to enter than the starting port 64. Thereby, the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation of a 2nd special symbol can be increased rather than a 1st special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give a lot of fluctuation (lottery) opportunities with the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player. Accordingly, the probability variation gaming state can be continued for a longer period and given to the player.

  Referring to FIG. 13 (a), the hit (probability change) special figure 1 change which is the change pattern selection table 202d for selecting the change pattern when the result of determining whether or not the first special symbol in the probability change gaming state is a win. The pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In this hit (probable variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation type counter includes a special 1 variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds and a special 2 variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds. It is set corresponding to the value of CS1. Specifically, a special 1 variation pattern is set for the value “0 to 190” of the variation type counter CS1, and a special 2 variation pattern is set for “191 to 198”.

  Thus, in the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state, either the variation time of 3 seconds or the variation time of 30 seconds is selected. Mainly, it is configured so that the variation time of 3 seconds is selected, so if the jackpot B is determined using this 3 seconds, the end of the probability variation period indicating the end of the probability variation gaming state A display mode is displayed. On the other hand, when the special 2 variation pattern is selected and the big hit B is determined, the effect that the probability variation period remains for the remaining maximum 30 seconds is executed. In the special 2 variation pattern, when the remaining variation time is 3 seconds, the same ending effect as the special 1 variation pattern may be executed.

  When the special 1 and special 2 variation patterns are selected and the jackpot A is determined, an effect indicating that the probability variation gaming state continues is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, an effect in which the counter indicating the remaining time of the probability change period shown in FIG. 5A stops or an effect that is added so that the remaining time of the probability change period does not become 0 seconds is executed. Furthermore, after the ending is once executed and the end of the probability variation period is notified, there may be a resurrection effect that resurrects and shows the player that the probability variation period has been set again.

  Next, referring to FIG. 13 (b), the deviation (probability variation) is set in the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern to be selected when the determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is unacceptable. The special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. The deviation (probable variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d includes a variation pattern of outlier 1 constituted by a variation time of 0.5 seconds and a variation pattern of deviation 2 constituted by a variation time of 3 seconds. In addition, a normal reach variation pattern composed of 10 seconds variation time and a super reach variation pattern composed of 20 seconds variation time are set in correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the deviation pattern 1 is set for the value “0 to 150” of the variation type counter CS1, the deviation pattern 2 is set for “151 to 170”, and “171 to 1701”. The normal reach variation pattern is set for “190”, and the super reach variation pattern is set for “191-198”.

  As described above, the variation pattern selected when the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is in the probability-changing gaming state is out of the selection is the variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds at a rate of 151/199. Will be. Therefore, in the second special symbol, if the determination result is out of place, the variation pattern of the extremely short variation time is selected as compared with the first special symbol. The number of changes in the second special symbol can be increased. Therefore, the lottery opportunities with the second special symbol can be increased, and the chances of winning the jackpot C to the player can be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the jackpot C is continuously determined and the probability variation gaming state is continuously given. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  Next, referring to FIG. 13C, the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern to be selected when the determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is a win is set (probability variation). The special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probability change) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In the hit (probable variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern of normal reach composed of a variation time of 10 seconds, a variation pattern of super reach composed of a variation time of 20 seconds, and a variation time of 30 seconds And the special reach variation pattern configured in the above are set in correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the normal reach fluctuation pattern is “0 to 150” of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the super reach fluctuation pattern is “151 to 190”, and the special pattern is “191 to 198”. Each reach variation pattern is set.

  As described above, when the determination result of the second special symbol is a win in the probability variation gaming state, a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds or more is selected. If the second special symbol is a win, the jackpot C that can be given a probable change gaming state after the jackpot game is always determined, so the change time set by the change pattern is used. Various notification effects can be performed for the period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, effects such as temporarily stopping a counter indicating the remaining time (period) of the probability variation period or adding a time of 10 seconds or more are executed. The Here, if it is a notification effect indicating that the probability variation gaming state continues for a long time, it can be appropriately executed.

  In this way, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variable at the same time, and when either one of the big symbols starts to change, It was configured to start the variable display that was forcibly removed. In this configuration, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpots, by setting the selection ratio of the jackpot type that can be given a probability variation gaming state, By making a difference between the advantages and disadvantages for the player by drawing the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, it is easy to set a long time to change the disadvantaged special symbols. By configuring so that many lotteries are executed in a short time with special symbols that are advantageous to the player, it is possible to give more advantageous lotteries to the player.

  In addition, in the case of a probable game state, in one special symbol (the first special symbol in this embodiment), a jackpot type to which a normal gaming state is given is set, and the other special symbol (this implementation) In the form, in the second special symbol), by setting so that the probability variation gaming state is always set, the period during which the variation of outage is executed in the special symbol to which the normal gaming state is given is certain. The player can be notified of the period during which the gaming state continues.

  Furthermore, is a reserved ball for which a big hit B (a big hit type to which a normal gaming state is given) determined for a reserved ball of a first special symbol stored in a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a described later? And the time until the jackpot B is fluctuated and stopped is regarded as the maximum remaining period of the probability variation period, and the player can be notified of the remaining period of the probability variation within the maximum remaining period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the probability variation period is set in advance. In addition, by configuring so that the notification effect of the remaining time of the probability variation period is subtracted linked to the actual time, the player can start the special symbol early, and in a high probability state advantageous to the player I can be excited to run many lotteries. Therefore, a novel game effect can be provided to the player. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the probability variation gaming state will continue for a long time by performing an effect that adds the remaining time of the probability variation period little by little, or by performing an effect that stops subtracting the remaining time of the probability variation period. In addition to the jackpot, it is possible to produce effects that give the player expectations.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the contents of the rough fluctuation pattern, reach, non-reach, etc., and also determines the fluctuation time, and the contents of the detailed fluctuation pattern are defined as audio. Although it is configured to be determined by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 may be configured to determine the details of the detailed variation pattern (reach display content, etc.). Alternatively, the main control device 110 may be configured such that determination control for the variation pattern is executed by the sound lamp control device 113 or another control device without determining the variation pattern.

  Note that “reach” means that there are a lot of different contents in each reach. For example, in super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed suddenly. There are reach to be displayed, etc. In addition, there are a plurality of reach having different contents such as a notice effect before the start of the variable display is added, and an effect that is a big hit in the re-variable display.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description of the various counters will be continued. The normal winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes the normal symbol start port 67. And the value of the random number that is a big hit of the normal symbol is set by the random symbol per normal symbol table 202c (FIG. 10D) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the normal random number counter C4 is In the case where the value matches the random number value set in the random number table 202c (FIG. 10D), the normal symbol hit is determined.

  Further, when the ordinary hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (through gate). . The number of random numbers to be won is 24 in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5-28”. Further, in the high probability gaming state, it is 200, and the range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state, when the acquired value of the normal random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined to be a win, and in the high probability gaming state, the value of the acquired normal random number counter C4 is determined. Is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the symbol “◯” is lit on the second symbol display section 88 as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the normal electric accessory 640a is displayed. In the normal gaming state, the blade 640a is released once for a predetermined time (1.2s in this embodiment), and in the high probability gaming state, the opening operation is twice for a predetermined time (1s in this embodiment). Done. The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 41).

  When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, when the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed and each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. In addition, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is variably displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment). Are stored in the normal random number counter storage area 203h1 corresponding to the number of holding times (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4. When a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the random number value is stopped, or the previous symbol has been digested. When data is shifted to the reserved area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area which is newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether the data is stored in the reserved area or whether the normal symbol is variably displayed is determined depending on which reserved area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display section 88 can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values. However, the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery game are selected. Set different counters for each game (second special symbol), and update them with different values by changing the update triggers and initial values of the various counters for the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Of course, the counter value may be configured.

  Thus, by configuring, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity, different counter values can be acquired. The fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the malfunction that the determination result of the success / failure is synchronized can be suppressed.

  In addition, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM having a small storage area) can be achieved.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 41), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 40) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 39) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, and a first special symbol reserved ball number. Counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, hour-short counter 203k, big hit state state area , Jackpot flag 203o, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, rearrangement storage area 203t, state setting area 203u, abnormal Monitoring flag 203v, other memory area 203 At least it has.

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning at the first start port 64 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that game balls have won the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variably displaying, the first special symbol is stored. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. .

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d are used for counters when a start winning is detected. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the buffer (see FIG. 9) is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first start port 64 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the MPU 201 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, The special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, and the variation type counter storage area 203a4 of the reserved ball storage area 203a are stored. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second start opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer in the same manner as the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data corresponding to each start prize stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1), it corresponds to one start prize. The data is shifted to the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f are detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 20) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning at the mouth 64 or the second starting port 640, the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed at the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined. Each counter counts up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 40, S1242). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is a counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 64. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls) is counted in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 640. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by one. It is.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 The data stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is used as the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 22, S203) or the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 26, FIG. 26). In step S206), a lottery lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  Further, the change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g passes the normal symbol starting port 67 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 20) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as “start winning prize”). On the first symbol display device 37 (the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81 and the variable display effect performed on the second symbol display device 88). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) up to 4 times each. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 40, S1242). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S1169 in FIG. 35).

  The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is a storage area for storing a normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) upon detection of a start winning at the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed to the normal symbol start port 67 (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the MPU 201 of the normal control random number counter C4 is read from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the normal random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is turned on and stored (stored) in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (held) up to four times. Yes. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding balls are stored in the order of passing from the holding area where the data is vacant in the order of passing to the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning prize). Is done.

  Further, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery or first This is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in the process of setting the display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect, the MPU 201 executes processes such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the normal random number counter C4) stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is used as the normal symbol holding ball. Shift to execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal random number counter C4 is stored and being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is in a variable display. When the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, it is set to ON. In addition, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number in which the reserved number is reduced and one reserved number is reduced), the value of the reserved area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area that has been shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour / hour number 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the time reduction count is set, the normal symbol random table for high probability is set in the normal symbol random table 202c until the time reduction count is set to zero. Further, when the symbol “◯” indicating the winning of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the blade of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is longer than the normal gaming state (1 s in this embodiment). The opening operation is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time-saving gaming state.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by 1 every time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing display. When the value of the hour / hour counter 203k becomes 0, the normal symbol is changed from the hour / short gaming state. When the random number table for the normal symbol for the low probability of the winning random number counter 202c is set and the symbol “◯” indicating the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the release time is 0.2 s. By setting the number of times of opening once, the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 640a are opened.

  The jackpot state area 203m is a storage area for storing a gaming state (time-short gaming state, probability-changing gaming state) set when the jackpot is executed. In the initial setting, data corresponding to the short-time gaming state is stored, and data corresponding to the probability changing gaming state is stored based on the game ball having entered the second specific entrance 650a during the jackpot game. The As a result, even if a big hit A or C that allows a game ball to enter the second specific entrance 650a is executed, the data set in the after jackpot state area 203m becomes data corresponding to the short-time gaming state, 2 When a game ball enters the specific entrance 650a, data corresponding to the probability variation game state is set (overwritten). As a result, unless the game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a, it can be configured not to shift to the probability variation game state, and whether or not the game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a. The player can play a game in anticipation of this.

  The jackpot flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the acquired value of the special random number counter C1 is a win at the start of fluctuation based on winning at the first start port 64 or the second start port 640. The flag to be set. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off. In addition, it is comprised with the flag which can identify whether it is a jackpot corresponding to which symbol of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and “10” is set to the jackpot flag 203o for the first special symbol, and “01” is set to the jackpot flag 203o for the second special symbol, At “00”, the big hit flag 203o is set to OFF.

  Here, since the jackpot flag 203o is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to ON first when the fluctuation starts. When the other lottery result is a big win, the big hit flag 203o is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same way as a miss. Thereby, it can process so that the fluctuation | variation display which becomes a jackpot simultaneously may not be performed with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol.

  In other words, when the variation display that is a big hit with either one of the special symbols is started, the variation display that is a big hit is not started on the other side, and only the out-of-change manner is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203o is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and independent jackpot flags are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. And you may comprise so that the fluctuation | variation display which becomes a jackpot simultaneously with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed. By adopting such a configuration, even when the variation display that becomes a big hit B is started with the first special symbol during the probability variation gaming state, the variation time is set long, and the short variation with the second special symbol By making it easy to draw lots by time, it is possible to make a big hit with the second special symbol before the big hit B is started. Therefore, an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state is finished) is executed, and the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect for playing a game. Therefore, a fresh performance can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol starts to be executed while the first special symbol is variably displayed. In S1005 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Moreover, in the process of S613 of a 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), it sets to OFF.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the process of S1012 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207), it is set to OFF.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S507 in FIG. 24). Thereafter, in the process of S602 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed variation time (in this embodiment, one by one) is subtracted and updated.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S907 in FIG. 28). Thereafter, in the process of S1002 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed fluctuation time (in this embodiment, one by one) is subtracted and updated.

  The rearrangement reserved storage area 203t is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area for storing each determination result determined based on each data of the holding areas 1 to 4 stored in the storage area.

  FIG. 17A is a diagram schematically showing the rearrangement hold storage area 203t. The rearrangement hold storage area 203t corresponds to the pending data storage area in which the determination data corresponding to the number of holds in the hold areas 1 to 8 is stored, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are displayed in a variable manner. And a changing data storage area in which each determination data to be stored is stored.

  In each of the holding areas 1 to 8 of the holding data, the success / failure determination result storage area 203t1, the big hit type storage area 203t2, the variation pattern type storage area 203t3, the variation order storage area 203t4, the variation start time storage area 203t5, and the prefetching probability variation flag 203t6. Are provided. In addition, the reservation areas 1 to 8 are stored in order from the reservation area 1 in the order in which the respective reservation balls are established (the overall establishment order in which the first start port 64 and the second start port 640 are combined). In other words, the reserved areas 1 to 8 indicate the order in which the reserved balls are established in the pachinko machine 10 by combining the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol.

  In the variable display data storage area, corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a determination result storage area 203t1, a big hit type storage area 203t2, a variation pattern storage area 203t3, and a prefetching probability change flag 203t6 are provided. It has been.

  The determination result storage area 203t1 is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). Is a storage area for storing the result of determining in advance whether or not the special hit random number counter C1 is stored.

  The jackpot type storage area 203t2 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area for storing the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2.

  The variation pattern type storage area 203t3 is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the type of variation pattern determined based on the various data stored in is stored. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data in the reserved area is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data for identifying whether the data is.

  The variable display order storage area 203t4 is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the actual change display start order in the reserved areas 1 to 8 determined based on the various data stored in is stored. The change display start order is specifically determined by calculating the change start time of a newly stored hold ball and comparing it with the change start time of each hold ball previously stored.

  The variation start time storage area 203t5 is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area for storing the time until each calculated data in the reserved areas 1 to 8 actually starts the variable display based on the various data stored in. It should be noted that when this variable display start time is stored in the holding area, it is updated as needed in other processing (S112) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  The prefetch probability change flag storage area 203t6 is turned on when it is determined in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 32, S1133) described later that the stored type of the big hit type storage area 203k2 is big hit A or big hit C. This is a storage area that is set and stored. In addition, every time data is shifted and stored in the upper reservation area, the pre-reading probability change flag storage area 203t6 is set to off because all the areas before the shift are cleared to zero. That is, the look-ahead certainty flag storage area 203u6 once set to ON is shifted to the changing data storage area and is set to OFF by overwriting (shifting) new data in the changing data storage area. . Further, when the gaming machine is turned on and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial value is set to OFF.

  In the pachinko machine 10, each data in the rearrangement storage area 203t is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203 when the power is cut off. When the power is turned on again, it is read from the stored backup area and set.

  The state setting area 203u is a storage area for storing the current gaming state. In the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot is switched by setting the data corresponding to the gaming state in the state setting area 203u based on the data stored in the state setting area 203m after the jackpot game. Is set. In addition, when a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) is executed in the short-time gaming state, data corresponding to the normal gaming state is set in the state setting area 203u, so that the gaming state is Transition from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state. In the initialized state, data corresponding to the normal gaming state is set.

  The abnormality monitoring flag 203v is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing a game with a correct gaming method corresponding to the current gaming state.

  It is correct to execute the right-handed game in the probability variation game state or the short-time game state (except during the jackpot game). In this case, the lottery is usually executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but during the period when the game is executed only with the second special symbol, the game is played in an illegal manner. There is a risk of doing. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to on. As will be described later, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, a period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is continuously set to ON is counted by an abnormality monitoring counter (not shown), and a predetermined time (in this embodiment) , 20 seconds) or longer, an abnormality notification (displays a sound and a warning image) is executed.

  Also, in the normal gaming state, it is a correct gaming method to play left-handed, but the normal ball fluctuates and the normal symbol fluctuates at the normal symbol starting port 67 that should only enter the right-handed When it is determined, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON and abnormality notification is executed.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  In this way, when a game ball wins at the first start port 64 or the second start port 640 and a hold ball is generated, each of the hold balls including the first start port 64 and the second start port 640 is arranged according to the formation order. Various determination data of the holding ball is stored. Therefore, by generating the winning command based on the rearrangement hold storage area 203u, the audio lamp control device 113 establishes the holding combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the winning command. A command to be output to the display control device 114 can be generated so as to display the reserved symbols in order. Therefore, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 the hold symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the order in which the hold is made by combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In addition, since the variable display start order of each hold is also determined and stored in relation to the establishment order, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command by generating a winning command based on the variable display start order. Based on the winning command that has been made, it is possible to determine the order in which the holds are made and the actual change display start order.

  In addition, since the change start time of each hold is stored in each hold area and the time is managed (updated as time elapses), the change display start order of the newly stored hold data can be easily performed. Can be determined.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open and close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display portion 88, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed to rearrange the displayed reserved symbol display in the order of the variable display start.

  A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the winning opening becomes an important factor for determining the gaming state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and prevent intentional winning at the winning opening. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 to 19, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222, at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an addition time selection table 222b are set.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. This variation pattern selection table 222a corresponds to a variation time indicated by a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, a rough variation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.), and a plurality of types of variation contents (for example, variation). One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns of the display contents having the same time and the same determination result.

  The addition time selection table 222b is used to determine the addition time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the addition time with respect to the remaining time of the probability variation period (the extended display time shown in FIG. 5B). It is a data table. In the addition time selection table 222b, an addition time is set corresponding to each addition time. It should be noted that the maximum time is a period until the variable display that becomes the big hit B is started, and when the selected addition time exceeds the maximum time, the addition time is set in the addition time selection table 222b. Control is performed so that a larger value within the maximum time is selected from the added time.

  In the present embodiment, the time until the first special symbol that becomes the big hit B starts to be changed is not limited to this, but the time until the change of the first special symbol that becomes the big hit B stops is the maximum time. You may comprise as follows.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d1, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1, a secondary special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2, and a second special symbol. Retained ball number counter 223d1, slave figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2, slave figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e, slave figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f, effect counter 223g, slave state setting area 223h, probability change upper limit storage area 223i, A probability change period storage area 223j, a secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, an update stop flag 223m, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The outside 1 special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, and is the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). The counter is a variable display (dynamic display) of a symbol, and counts the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. (FIG. 46, S1502). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1612).

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. (FIG. 46, S1505). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1617).

  The slave figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON when a first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received ( FIG. 46, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1622).

  The slave special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is a flag indicating the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p in the main controller 110. Thereby, the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 can be determined by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d1 is a second special symbol held by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) in the same manner as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. The counter is a variable display (dynamic display) of a symbol, and counts the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times.

  The second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from main controller 110 is received (FIG. 46). , S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1622).

  The secondary special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is a flag indicating the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q in the main controller 110. Thereby, the fluctuation state of the special figure 2 can be discriminated by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The slave figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

  The slave figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated.

  In the slave state setting area 223h, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the sub-status setting area 223h, the current gaming status can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed-up gaming state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  The probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is a storage area in which the time until the start of the variation that becomes the big hit B of the first special symbol is stored. In addition, when the reservation ball | bowl which becomes the big hit B is not memorize | stored in the reservation ball | bowl of the 1st special symbol, time until the fluctuation | variation of the last reservation ball | bowl of the storage ball | bowl of the 1st special symbol memorize | stored is complete | finished It is stored in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k is the same data as the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110, based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. Is a storage area that is stored based on a winning command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing this secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k. The secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k stores a hold area of pending data from the hold area 1 to the hold area 8, and various data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And a storage area for data during variable display. Each holding area includes a success / failure determination result storage area 223k1, a jackpot type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a follower reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6, and a rearrangement flag 223k7. Each data extracted from the received winning command is stored in the corresponding reserved area. Further, each time a display variation pattern command for starting the variation display of the special symbol is generated, the data in the reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is shifted to the previous reserved area and stored. In the case of the first special symbol, the reserved data in the reserved area 1 is stored in the storage area of the changing data of the first special symbol, and in the case of the second special symbol, the changing data of the second special symbol is stored. Each is shifted and stored in the storage area.

  The determination result storage area 223k1 is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the result of determining in advance whether or not the special hit random number counter C1 is stored is extracted from the received winning command and stored. The information on the determination result of the success / failure extracted from the winning command is the determination result storage area of any one of the reservation areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of reservations (the corresponding reservation area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110). It is stored in 223k1.

  The jackpot type storage area 223k2 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is extracted from the received winning command and stored.

  The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the type of variation pattern determined based on the various data stored in is extracted from the received winning command and stored. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data in the reserved area is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data for identifying whether the data is.

  The change order storage area 223k4 is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch processing (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch processing (FIG. 31, S1114). This is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the reserved areas 1 to 8 determined based on the various stored data is extracted from the received winning command and stored.

  The variation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the calculated time until each data in the reserved areas 1 to 8 actually starts the variable display is extracted from the received winning command and stored based on the various data stored in . When this variable display start time is stored in the hold area, it is updated as needed in the hold number display process (FIG. 45, S1406) of the main process (FIG. 45, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The

  In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until each calculated data in the reserved areas 1 to 8 actually starts the variable display. Each counter value for calculating the time (for example, the type of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol being fluctuated (number of interrupts, etc.)) and fluctuation display start It may be a command corresponding to the time until.

  The follow-reading probability change flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 223k2 is 15R probability change big hit or 2R probability change big hit.

  The rearrangement flag 223k7 indicates that the player has operated the frame button 22 to request the rearrangement of the hold symbol display (the hold symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated). Flag.

  As described above, when a game ball wins at the first start port 64 or the second start port 640 and a holding ball is generated, the first start port 64 and the second start port 640 are based on the data extracted from the win command. And various determination data of each holding ball are stored according to the formation order of the holding balls. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 performs the hold symbol display in the order in which the hold is made by combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on the data of the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k. A command to be output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 the hold symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the order in which the hold is made by combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Further, based on the winning command, the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k is updated with data synchronized with the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110, and there is a change in the hold data (such as establishment of a new hold). In addition, the data can be sequentially updated in synchronization.

  The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

  When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores each data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is read from the backup area, and each corresponding hold area in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is changing. Stored in the data storage area.

  Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 40), similar to the winning command generated in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 32, S1127), based on the rearrangement pending storage area 203u in which the backed up data is read and stored. As a result, all winning commands are generated and output to the audio lamp control device 113, so that data synchronized with the same rearrangement hold storage area 203u is also set in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k.

  In the start-up process (FIG. 40), a winning command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, so that the data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k can be restored even after a power failure. Although the structure to synchronize was demonstrated, it is not restricted to it, Like MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110, MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 backs up each data of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k to RAM223 at the time of a power failure occurrence As a matter of course, the configuration may be stored as:

  The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) circuit 253 is pressed when the power is turned on (while turning on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122)). In this case, the RAM erase signal SG2 is output to the main controller 110 to clear the backup data. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method in which an opening mark remains such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is canceled, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after canceling the system reset via the bus line 240 and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and performs display control of the third symbol display device 81.

  When a game ball wins the first starting port 64, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired, and after determination of the lottery and the variation pattern based on each acquired counter value, The variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Further, when a game ball wins at the second start opening 640, each counter value (C1) is displayed for displaying the variation of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery game machine, as in the case of winning at the first start opening 64. To C3 and CS1) are acquired, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, the left 7-segment LED of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment indicator 37b executes the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the right 7-segment LED is displayed. In the segment LED, a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

  Moreover, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, as shown to Fig.4 (a), the fluctuation | variation display corresponding to a 1st special symbol (or 2nd special symbol) is performed in the display area Dm, and the upper right display area Dn The variable display corresponding to the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) is executed in a simple display mode (◯ or ×). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variable display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. .

  When a game ball wins at the first start port 64 while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variation display (remaining variation time is set), each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winning is obtained. The first lottery game for variably displaying the lottery result is not executed immediately, and each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a mode (for example, one number) indicating the number of reserved “1” of the first special symbol of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is stored. The light-emitting diode is lit red. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is updated (the number of reserved balls is incremented by 1).

  When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the sound lamp control device 113. In the winning command, it is possible to identify which of the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 is won, and it is possible to identify the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls).

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the holding information such as the number of holdings and information about the winning starting port from the received command, and based on the holding information, the third symbol display device In 81, a process of displaying the reserved symbols in the corresponding reserved symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) in the lower display area Ds is executed. As shown in FIG. 4 (b), if the reserved symbol is a reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved information of the first special symbol (first start port 64), the “black circle” is displayed as the second special symbol (first In the case of the holding symbol corresponding to the holding information of the 2 starting port 640), a “black triangle” is displayed for each holding information (one holding symbol per holding).

  Similarly, each counter value is acquired when a game ball wins the second start port 640 while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variation display (remaining variation time is set), and a second special symbol holding ball storage area is obtained. It is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is updated. A hold symbol indicating that the hold information is stored is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a total winning order including the game balls won in the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640, respectively. The example shown in FIG. 18 will be specifically described. First, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a variable display, the first special symbol has a remaining variation time of 10s, and the second special symbol has a remaining variation time of 5s. Show. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol “indicating that the reserved symbol display area Ds 1 is the reserved information of the second special symbol (the reserved information based on the winning to the second starting port 640). The black symbol “black triangle” indicates that the reserved symbol “black circle” is the reserved information of the first special symbol in the reserved symbol display area Ds2, and the reserved symbol “black circle” is the reserved information of the second special symbol in the reserved symbol display area Ds3. A reserved symbol “black triangle” indicating that the reserved symbol “black triangle” is the reserved information of the first special symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4. In this case, it is shown that the order of winning in the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 is the order of the reserved symbol display area Ds4 in order from the reserved symbol display area Ds1.

  In other words, after a game ball has won the second start port 640, the first start port 64 is won, then the second start port 640 is won, and then the first start port 64 is played. Indicates that the ball has won.

  As shown in FIG. 18, each hold data is stored in advance by predicting the change time of the change pattern selected when the hold starts to change (the type of change pattern to be determined is stored). Have been). Since the second special symbol is stored in the first prize winning order (the reserved area 1 corresponds to the reserved storage area 203u), the remainder of the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stored. When the variation time (5 s) elapses, the variation display start time is calculated as 5 seconds after the variation display starts. In addition, since the first special symbol is stored in the second winning order (the reserved area 2u in the rearrangement storage area 203u is stored), the remaining first special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner. When the variation time (10 s) elapses, the variation display start time is calculated as 10 seconds after the variation display starts. Next, since the second special symbol is stored in the third prize winning order (the reserved area 3 corresponds to the reserved storage area 203u), the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stored. When the variation time (40 s) of the pending data stored first in the winning order has elapsed in the remaining variation time (5 s), the variation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since it is the first special symbol hold that is stored in the fourth winning order (the hold area 4 corresponds in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u), the first special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stored. When the fluctuation time (10 s) of the pending data stored in the second winning order has elapsed in the remaining fluctuation time (10 s), the fluctuation display starts, and therefore the fluctuation display start time is calculated as 20 seconds later.

  As described above, the variable display start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is calculated in the rearrangement storage area 203u in the order of establishment (winning), and the variable display start time is calculated based on the variable display start time. The variable display order is assigned in ascending order.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 at this timing, the reserved symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 holds the first special symbol in the fourth winning order as shown in the rearranged display mode shown in FIG. The symbol display is rearranged with the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol in the third winning order (the fourth reserved symbol display in the winning order interrupts before the third reserved symbol display in the winning order).

  FIG. 19 shows that, after 1 s from the state of FIG. 18, when a game ball wins the first starting port 64, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114) is a diagram schematically showing a process of determining the change display start order of the stored symbols newly stored.

  FIG. 19 shows a state after 1 s from FIG. 18, so the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has a remaining fluctuation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining fluctuation time of 4 s. In addition, the change start time of each reserved area in the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u is also updated.

  The newly established hold of the first start port 64 (first special symbol) becomes the fifth winning order, and each data is stored in the hold area 5 in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u. First, add the remaining variation time of the first special symbol being displayed in the same manner as the newly stored first special symbol, and the variation time of the first special symbol of the winning order 2 and 4, respectively. The time when the hold of the first special symbol that has been established (stored) starts the variable display is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

  Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 19, the rearranged order (variable display start order) is reset in the order of starting the variable display based on the variable display start time of each reserved area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 to request the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the display mode after the rearrangement in FIG. Are rearranged with the third reserved symbol display in the winning order (the fourth and fifth reserved symbols in the winning order are interrupted before the third reserved symbol display in the winning order).

  Thus, each time a hold occurs, the change display start time is calculated and the rearrangement order is determined, so that the player can perform an operation for requesting rearrangement (operation of the frame button 22). In this case, it is possible to promptly display the reserved symbol display after the rearrangement.

  Also, the fluctuation pattern of 15R probability variation jackpot and 15R normal jackpot tends to be longer than the fluctuation pattern selected when the fluctuation time is out of place. As shown in FIG. 19, the first hold in the winning order has a long variation time of 40 seconds. Therefore, the hold of the same second special symbol that was established after that will be delayed in the variable display start time than the hold of the first special symbol that was established later. Behind the reserved symbol display, a different type (difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) different from the reserved for which the long variation time is selected is displayed together. Therefore, the more the number of the reserved symbol display that is interrupted and displayed in the subsequent reserved symbol display area of the reserved symbol display, the more the player has a big expectation for the previous reserved symbol display, the player Sorting can be done with the expectation of jackpot. Therefore, interest in the game increases, and the game can be continued without getting tired.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 20 to 43. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (FIG. 40) that is activated when the power is turned on, a main process (FIG. 41, S1250) that is executed after the startup process, and periodically (this embodiment). In this case, there are a timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) activated at a cycle of 2 milliseconds and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 39) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then startup processing (FIG. 40) and main processing (FIG. 41, S1250) will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) and the main process (FIG. 41, S1250), commands and the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes and provided in the RAM 203. Temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

  For example, the reserve ball number command set in the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed for this purpose (S103). In other words, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a has elapsed, or the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a has a ball. It is determined whether or not a prescribed number has been won. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning port 65a or the specific winning port 650a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a or the specific winning port 650a is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S104). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized (in the present embodiment, 399, 99, and 239, respectively). When it reaches, each clears to 0. When the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter. The initial value of C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4. The updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 to set the third symbol variation pattern is executed. Next, a start winning process associated with winning a prize at the first start port 64 or the second start port 640 is executed (S108). Details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process (S108) is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a normal symbol variation process for the game ball passing through the normal symbol start port 67, is performed (S109). A through gate process is executed for the game ball passing through (S110). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, and details of the through gate process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a fluctuation monitoring process is executed (S111), and a fraud monitoring process is executed (S112). Details of the fluctuation monitoring process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, and details of the fraud monitoring process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S112 is completed, a launch control process for executing control relating to the launch of the game ball is executed (S113), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S114), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. To do. In the firing control process (S113), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variation process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S107). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) performs various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by predetermined control. In this manner, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled so as to be able to perform variable display at the same time, or are controlled to be stopped and displayed in a display manner indicating the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). If it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 25, S204) will be described in detail later, but the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during variation display has elapsed. The process of stopping the variable display in the process, and the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display when the second special symbol is variably stopped at the symbol showing the big win and the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed Is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in a variable display (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) will be described later in detail. When the first special symbol variation is temporarily stopped, the processing for restarting the variable display is executed, while the temporary suspension is performed. If not, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the hold data are executed. .

  After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in a variable display (S205). If it is determined that the second special symbol is in a variable display (S205: Yes), a second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) will be described in detail later. Similar to the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), the prescribed variation of the second special symbol during the variable display is displayed. When time has elapsed, the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game, and the variable display of the first special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot are stopped, and the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed In this case, a process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol during the variable display is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in a variable display (S205: No), a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206) will be described in detail later. Similar to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), when the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. The process for resuming the variable display is executed. On the other hand, if it is not temporarily stopped, if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, A jackpot determination or variation pattern selection process based on the pending data is executed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), this process is ended as it is. When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S303). . A process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305) will be described in detail later, but the game set based on the value of the special special random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the status, a jackpot determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot is successful.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306), and then this process is terminated. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306), which will be described in detail later, is based on the result of the success / failure determination based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability changing gaming state (probability changing) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is set to ON. If it is determined that the probability change flag is on (that is, the game state is a probability change game state (probability change in progress)) (S402: Yes), a special hit based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability is used. It is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not being probability variation)) (S402: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability time (FIG. 10 (b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

  It is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203o is on (S405). Here, when the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON, it indicates that a variation that becomes a jackpot is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203o is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that the variation that becomes a big jackpot is not executed simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem in which jackpots are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the game store side becomes excessively large.

  In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is off, that is, when it is determined that the variation that becomes a big hit in the second special symbol has not started (S405: No), the processing of S403 or S404 is performed. It is determined whether the executed lottery result is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S406: Yes), the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S407). Thereafter, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the jackpot type (S409). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the big hit flag 203o is on (S405: Yes), or if it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S406 (S406: No), the second A symbol indicating the detachment of the first special symbol is set in the one special symbol display device 37 (S410).

  In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 actually acquired is a big win, the big hit flag 203o is already set to ON, that is, according to the second special symbol, When the big hit is started, the setting of forcible setting is forcibly executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the big win change is not executed at the same time, and the big win change is started in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress problems that cause excessive damage.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to perform the big hit variation at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to execute simultaneously. In this case, a special jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, if the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, the fluctuation of one special symbol temporarily stops the measurement of the fluctuation time, It is conceivable to configure to temporarily stop.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), it is determined whether the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot is set in the processing of S408. Here, it is configured so that it is possible to determine whether or not it is a big hit by setting a dedicated flag (not shown) to ON.

  In the process of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (any one of the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, or the short-time gaming state) is set. The variation pattern selection table 202d in which the result of determining whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate is a jackpot (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired from the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10B) (S503). Thereafter, the process of S505 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the first special symbol has been set off (S501: No), the lottery result of the first special symbol corresponding to the gaming state is a change pattern selection table 202d. Is set (S504). Thereafter, the process of S505 is executed.

  In the process of S505, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the set fluctuation pattern selection table 202d based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S505). A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected fluctuation pattern is generated (set) (S506). Based on the selected variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r (S507). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S601). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to OFF (S601: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is subtracted and updated. (S602). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated special 1 variation time counter 203r is 0, that is, the variation end timing of the first special symbol (S603). If it is determined that it is not the change end timing (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S603, when it is determined that it is the variation time end timing (S603: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is set for the first special symbol that is varying (S604). When it is determined that the big bonus is set for the first special symbol (S604: Yes), the special symbol 2 variable stop flag 203q for setting the temporary stop of the second special symbol is set to ON. (S605). Next, a special figure 2 variable stop command indicating that the special figure 2 variable stop flag 203q is on is set (S606). Thereafter, the start of the big hit game based on the selected big hit type is set (S607). The time reduction counter 203k is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S608), and then the process proceeds to S609.

  On the other hand, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the deviation is set for the changing first special symbol (S604: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / hour counter 203k is 0 (S611). . When it is determined that the hour / hour counter 203k is greater than 0 (S611: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S612). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S609. On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that the time counter 203k is 0 (S611: No), the process of S612 is not performed and the process directly proceeds to S609.

  In the processing of S609, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing to confirm and stop the main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S609). The change stop of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S610). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S601 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is on (S601: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (S613). A special figure 1 variable stop command indicating that the variable stop flag 203p is OFF is set (S614). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  By configuring in this way, when the big hit is made with the first special symbol and the big hit game is started, the second special symbol can be set to be temporarily stopped. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the remaining fluctuation time can be resumed for the second special symbol that is changing. Therefore, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, if one special symbol is a big hit, it temporarily stops the changing other and waits until the big hit game ends. This allows the player to concentrate on the jackpot game.

  Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), the number of first special symbol reservation balls in each process from S301 to S306 with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) described above. The counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol big hit determination process (S305), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) In each process from S701 to S706, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol reserved ball hit determination process (S705) Since the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) is the same except for the change, the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27, S705), the first special symbol reservation ball execution area is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305) as compared to the process of S401. In the process of S801 203c, in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, in the process of S408, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the process of S808. In contrast to the processes of S409 and S410, the first special symbol is the same as the process of S809 and S810 except that it is changed to the second special symbol.

  Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S706), the special figure 1 lottery result (first) is different from the process of S501 in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) described above. In the process in which the special symbol lottery result is S901, the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern command (first special symbol) is added to the special symbol 2 lottery result (second special symbol lottery result) for each process from S506 to S507. Except that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s for each of the processes of S906 to S907. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (S207).

  The second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 25, S204) in the following points. In each process from S1001 to S1002 corresponding to each process from S601 to S602, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p and the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r are the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s. Respectively. In the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603, the determination whether the variation time of the first special symbol is the end timing is changed to the determination of whether the variation time of the second special symbol is the end timing. In the process of S1004 corresponding to the process of S604, the determination of whether or not the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is changed to the determination of the jackpot of Special Figure 2 or not. In each process of S1005 to S1010 corresponding to each process of S605 to S610, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command, the first special symbol jackpot start, the special figure 1 confirmation command, the first special The symbol fluctuation stop is changed to a special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p, a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command, a second special symbol jackpot start, a special figure 2 confirmation command, and a second special symbol fluctuation stop, respectively. In each process of S1013 to S1014 corresponding to each process of S613 to S614, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command become a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q and a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command, respectively. Be changed. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Can be made. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the lottery game is executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed at the same time, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, Since the change display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In addition, since the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, the player can confirm that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display has not disappeared. It is possible to grasp and can play jackpot games with peace of mind.

  Next, the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). In the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108), it is determined whether the game ball has won the first start port 64 or the second start port 640. This is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, up to a maximum of four for each of the two start ports 640. When each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or based on each counter value memorize | stored in each of the 2nd special symbol reservation ball | bowl storage area 203b, the process which predicts a determination result or the variation pattern etc. selected beforehand is performed. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108) will be described.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first start opening 64 (start winning) (S1101). Here, a winning at the first start port 64 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first start opening 64 (start winning has been received) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). This is discriminated whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first start port 64 (that is, whether the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (1104). A reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (S1105). Various counter values, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the special special reserved ball execution area 203c in the RAM 203 is special. The winning random number counter storage area 203c1, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the variation type counter storage area 203c3 are each suspended (stored) (S1106).

  Next, the first prefetch process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) will be described in detail later, but a first special display in which the variable display start order based on each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a is stored. It is determined in advance what number the symbol and the second special symbol are combined, and the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. from the variation display order and the stored counter values A process for determining is performed.

  Next, for each process from S1108 to S1114, the same process as the process performed for winning the game ball to the first start opening 64 performed in each process from S1101 to S1107 is the second. The only difference is that the process is executed for the start port 640, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the first look-ahead process (S1107), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 20, S108), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch process (S1107).

  In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107), first, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a, fluctuation, Each value of the type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203t, and the variable display based on the newly stored hold data (each counter value) is started. The variable display start time is calculated (S1122).

  As shown in FIG. 18, the fluctuation start time is a special symbol during fluctuation display corresponding to the newly stored pending data (if the pending data is based on the first start port 64, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, If the hold data is based on the start port 640, the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol) and each hold data stored previously based on the same start port 64,640 as the newly stored hold data are determined. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation times.

  Here, each of the stored data previously stored based on the same start port as the newly stored stored data is the first stored data if the stored data is stored data based on the first start port 64. Is stored data based on the first start port 64 (corresponding to the first special symbol) stored on the other hand, if the newly stored stored data is the hold data based on the second start port 640, it is stored first This is reserved data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second start port 640 that has been set.

  When the variable display start time is calculated, the order after the rearrangement is renumbered in order from the earliest variable display start time of all the hold data stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203t (S1123). Here, regarding the renumbering of the variable display start time, in this embodiment, the renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but not limited to this, when the previous and the variable display start order are switched, that is, When the newly stored variable data display start order of the stored data is interrupted by the previously stored variable data display start order, only the order of the change may be renumbered. Good.

  It is determined whether the gaming state when the newly stored pending data starts to change is a high probability gaming state (S1124). As for the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation, there is a game state in which the pre-reading probability change flag 203t6 is turned on although it is stopped by the time when the newly stored pending data starts to fluctuate, and thereafter, there is a holding that stops at the 15R normal big hit. It is determined by determining whether there is any. When it is determined that the gaming state when the newly stored pending data starts to fluctuate is the high probability gaming state (S1124: Yes), the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability time Based on the above, it is predicted whether or not the first special symbol is correct, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement hold storage area 203t (S1125). On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state when the newly stored pending data starts to fluctuate is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S1124: No), the special symbol jackpot for the low probability time Based on the jackpot determination value of the random number table 202a, whether or not the first special symbol is predicted is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement hold storage area 203t (S1126).

  The first prefetch update process is executed (S1127). The first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1127) will be described in detail later, but the determination result of the hold data (various counter values) stored in the sort hold storage area 203t in the order in which the variable display is actually started. Is stored (updated), the jackpot type (whether or not it is a probable change) and the fluctuation pattern (variation time).

  Next, the first prefetch update process (S1127) which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update process (S1127).

  In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 32, S1127), first, it is determined whether the success / failure judgment result predicted in the process of S1125 or S1126 in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) is a big hit (S1131). If it is determined that the success / failure determination result predicted in S1125 or S1126 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) is a jackpot (S1131: Yes), is the predicted jackpot a jackpot A or jackpot B? It is determined (S1132). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1132: Yes), the prefetching probability change flag 203t6 of the rearrangement hold storage area 203t corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to ON. (S1133). Note that when the data is shifted and stored in the upper reservation area, the pre-reading probability change flag 203t6 is set to OFF because the data in the reservation area before the shift is cleared to zero. That is, the prefetching probability change flag 203t6 once set to ON is set to OFF by sequentially shifting the holding area and then overwriting (clearing to 0) the next new data in the changing data storage area. Is done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S1132: No), the processing of S1134 is executed.

  Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the stored data newly stored from the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the gaming state at the beginning of variation display (whether it is probable change or time reduction) The determined variation pattern is predicted (S1134). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1136.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the determination as to whether or not the result of the prediction in S1125 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) is out of place (S1131: No), the gaming state at the start of the variable display (probability change or time reduction). The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to whether or not the medium is in the middle (S1135). ). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1136.

  In the process of S1136, the predicted success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern are stored in an area corresponding to the winning order in the rearrangement hold storage area 203t (corresponding to the newly stored hold data) (S1136). It is determined whether the change display start order of the hold data newly stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203t has been stored by changing (changing the order) to the change display start order stored previously (S1137). . It is determined that the change display start order of the hold data newly stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203t is not stored by changing (changing the order) into the change display start order stored previously. If YES in step S1137, the process advances to step S1139. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change display start order of the hold data newly stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203t is stored by changing (changing the order) into the change display start order stored previously. (S1137: Yes), the pending data after the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored pending data (the pending data in the order in which the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored pending data starts to fluctuate and then starts to fluctuate) ) Is again predicted, updated, stop type, and variation pattern (S1138). Next, based on the success / failure type, change pattern, winning pattern, winning order, changing display start order, and pre-reading probability change flag 203t6 corresponding to all the hold data stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203t, the data is voiced. A winning command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is generated for each hold data (S1139).

  In this way, when the game ball wins at the first start port 64 or the second start port 640 and is held until the corresponding special symbol can be started to be displayed in a variable manner, whether or not it is determined or selected is determined before the start of the variable display. The change pattern is determined, and the change start order in the hold is also calculated. Therefore, when the reserved symbol display is displayed, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of the change start by the player's operation.

  Further, when a new hold is stored and the order of change start by the hold is changed (the newly stored change start order of the change is interrupted and stored), it is again stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203t. Among the stored areas, the determination of success / failure, the type of change, and the fluctuation pattern are updated for the hold that starts changing after the newly stored hold is stopped, so the hold is newly stored. Thus, even when the gaming state (high probability gaming state or low probability gaming state) at the start of change changes, it can be updated to accurate data.

  In the present embodiment, when the newly stored change start order of the hold is interrupted and stored, the hold data (whether determination, stop type, change pattern) in the hold area is updated again. Not limited to this, when a new hold is stored, all the hold areas may be determined again each time. By configuring in this way, the data in the holding area can be updated each time a new hold is stored, and can always be configured with more accurate data.

  Next, the second look-ahead process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the second prefetch process (S1114).

  The second prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114) is prefetched and stored in advance based on the fact that the first prefetching process (FIG. 31, S1107) has won the first start port 64. While this is a process for determining the order in which the variable data starts to be displayed and performing various determinations, the stored data is pre-read and stored in advance based on the fact that the second start port 640 has been won. Since the same processing is executed only in that it is the processing for determining the variable display start order and performing various determinations, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Also, in the second prefetch update process (S1147), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114) shown in FIG. 34, the first prefetch update process (FIG. 32, S1127) described above is the first. This is a process for predicting various selection data based on the change display start order of the hold data based on winning at the 1 start opening 64 and generating a winning command, while winning at the 2nd start opening 640. Based on the change display start order of the pending data based on that, the selection process is predicted and a winning command is generated. To do.

  In this way, a game ball wins at the first start port 64 or the second start port 640, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. When the hold data is stored (the stored data is stored), the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114) is executed. The newly stored pending data is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203t in the first prefetching process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114), in which the order of starting the variable display is first sorted. Since it is determined by comparing with the variable display start time of each held data that has been stored, the game state (whether or not the probability change is in progress) is accurately determined when the stored data that has been stored is started to be displayed in a variable manner. can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the determination result, the stop type, the variation pattern displayed in a variable manner, and the like. Therefore, next, when the reserved data is newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first prefetch processing (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second Based on the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of each pending data predicted in the prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114), the fluctuation display start time of the newly stored pending data can be accurately predicted. As a result, the correct variation display start order can be predicted.

  In addition, when the variable display start order of the newly stored pending data is stored (interrupted earlier) and stored in the previously stored variable display start order of the stored data, the newly stored hold For each pending data in the variable display start order after the data, the gaming state at the start of the variable display is predicted again by the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). Accordingly, since the prediction (prefetching) of the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern is performed, a winning command can be generated based on a more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored hold data from the winning command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the normal symbol variation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 640a, and the like.

  In the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 35, S109), first, it is determined whether the current symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1161). The normal symbol (second symbol) hitting includes the period from the time when the second symbol display unit 83 displays the winning symbol to the middle when the opening / closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is being performed. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1161: Yes), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S1161: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol on the second symbol display unit 83 is in the variable display (S1162). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1162: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display unit 83 has elapsed ( S1163). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S1184 and the processing of S1185, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  In the process of S1163, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1163: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1163 that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S1163: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display unit 83 is set (S1164). . In the process of S1164, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1178, the second symbol display section 83 displays the “○” symbol as a second symbol (lighted display). ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S1177, the “x” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display portion 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When stop display is set by the processing of S1164, the variable display in the second symbol display unit 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set in the processing of S1177 and S1178. 2 Stop display (lighting display) on the symbol display section 83.

  Next, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1165). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1165: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set (1166). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is out of place (S1165: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1162 that the normal symbol is not in a variable display (S1162: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1167).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1168). If it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1168: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S1168: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1169).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1170). In the process of S1170, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203h is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on in each area. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i is acquired (S1171).

  Next, it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1172). When it is determined that the value of the time-shortage counter 203k is 0 (that is, not within the time-shortening) (S1172: No), the hit determination value of the random symbol table per normal symbol for low probability (FIG. 10 (d)) On the basis of the result, the determination result is obtained (S1173). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203k is not 0 (that is, the hour is shorter) (S1172: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted ( S1174). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1174: Yes), the processing of S1173 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1174: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability (FIG. 10 (d)) is used. Based on this, the determination result is obtained (S1175).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1176). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not winning (that is, it is out of place) (S1176: No), the display mode of “x” that is the display mode at the time of losing is set. (S1177). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, a win) (S1176: Yes), the display mode of “O” that is the display mode of the win is displayed. It is set (S1178).

  It is determined whether the gaming state is in the short-time gaming state (including the probability variation gaming state) (S1179). When it is determined that the time-short game is being played (S1179: Yes), the process of S1181 is executed. If it is determined that the time-short game is not being played (S1179: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1180). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1180: Yes), the processing of S1181 is executed.

  In the process of S1181, the opening time of the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1181). On the other hand, in the process of S1180, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in a big hit game (that is, a low probability game state) (S1180: No), the ordinary electric accessory 640a The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1182).

  It is determined whether the gaming state is in the short-time gaming state (including the probability variation gaming state) (S1183). If it is determined that the time is short (S1183: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 s (S1184). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is not short (S1183: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1185). After the processing of S1184 and S1185 is executed, this processing is terminated.

  Next, the through-gate passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S110). This through gate passing process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, and when the game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 36, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1191). Here, it is detected over three timer interruption processes that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67. If it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol start port 67 (S1191: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1192). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1193).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol start port (gate) 67 (S1191: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S1193: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 (S1191: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1193: Yes), the normal symbol retention ball number counter One is added to the value (M) of 203 g (S1194). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above and the first normal symbol flag are used as an empty reserved area (ordinary symbol hold 1 to normal symbol in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203). Stored in the first area of the hold 4) (S1195). In the process of S1195, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 0, the normal symbol reservation 1 area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal symbol hold 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal symbol hold 3 area, if the value is 3, the normal symbol hold 4 area first. The area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the fluctuation monitoring process (S111) which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation monitoring process (S111). In this variation monitoring process (S111), a process of monitoring whether the player is playing a correct game corresponding to the gaming state is executed. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), a method of playing a game by a method of firing the game ball with the strength that the game ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter, left-handed). Is a regular gaming method, and in the jackpot game, in the short-time game state, in the probability variation game state, the method of hitting the game ball with the strength that the game ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter, right-handed) ) Is a regular game method. In the normal gaming state, the state in which the ordinary electric accessory 640a blocks the second start port 640 is the normal state, and the winning rate to the first start port 64 on the right side is lower than that on the left first start port 64. Since it is set, it is disadvantageous for the player to make a right hit in the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage to the player by monitoring whether the game is played in the correct way. In addition, it is possible to monitor whether the player strikes the player illegally and wins the second starting port 640, and damage caused by the unauthorized operation can be reduced.

  In the variation monitoring process (FIG. 37, S111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1201). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being played (S1201: No), it is determined whether the game is in the probable gaming state or the short-time gaming state (S1202). If it is determined that the game is in the probable gaming state or the short-time gaming state (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is variably stopped (S1203). When it is determined that the first special symbol is in a variable stop state (S1203: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing a game in the correct gaming method (left-handed or right-handed) corresponding to the gaming state. As will be described later, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 20 seconds or longer), an abnormality notification command is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the abnormality notification by the command. (Characters indicating abnormality in the 3rd symbol display device 81 (for example, character display suggesting the correct gaming method (please make a right stroke)) are executed, and an error sound or an instruction voice to the correct game is generated by voice. Is output and an abnormal signal is output to the hall computer)).

  As described above, when the probability variation gaming state or the time-shortening state is in effect, the right gaming method is a state in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in the right-handed game. If one special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner for a certain period of time, it is possible to monitor whether an illegal game is performed in which a game is performed so that the first special symbol that is disadvantageous for the player by notifying the abnormality is not displayed in a variable manner. it can. Therefore, fraud can be detected at an early stage, and damage to the amusement store can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1201 that the game is a jackpot game (S1201: Yes), if it is determined in S1203 that the first special symbol is changing (S1203: No), abnormality monitoring is performed. The flag 203v is set off (S1205).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the game is not in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state (S1202: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed (S1206). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is being performed (S1206: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204).

  As described above, when the normal symbol that can be changed only in the right-handed game is variably displayed in the normal game state in which the right-handed game is not executed, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON. Note that when 20 seconds elapses with the abnormality monitoring flag 203v set to ON, an abnormality alarm command is set. However, after a big hit game, a time-short game, or a probabilistic game is finished, a normal symbol holding ball (maximum 4 balls) ) Is stored, the normal symbol is variably displayed even when the state shifts to the left-handed state, so the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON. In this case, the variation time of the normal symbol is Since it is 3 seconds, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to OFF before the abnormality alarm command is set. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a problem that abnormality notification is executed even though a game is played with a correct gaming method.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1206, when it is determined that the normal symbol is stopped (S1206: No), it is determined whether the second special symbol is variably displayed (S1207). If it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S1207: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204).

  In this way, when the gaming state is not the short-time gaming state or the probability-changing gaming state, that is, the normal gaming state, it is a normal gaming method to play the game left-handed, but when the player hits the right-handed, the variable display If the second special symbol that can be changed is changing, it means that the game is played in the wrong game method. Therefore, by setting the abnormality monitoring flag 203v to ON, an abnormality notification is executed when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set ON for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds) or more. Can be discovered earlier. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage to the game store due to fraud.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1207 that the second special symbol is in a variable stop state (S1207: No), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to OFF (S1208). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In the fluctuation monitoring process (S111), the determination as to whether the normal symbol, the first special symbol, or the second special symbol is stopped is a state where the fluctuation is stopped in a state where the reserved ball is not stored. . In a state in which the held ball is stored, a temporary stop state (a stop state from the change stop to the start of change by the next hold ball) is determined not to be in the change stop but in the change state.

  Here, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the second special symbol is variably stopped, the game is played with the left game which is the correct gaming method, so the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to OFF. Thus, setting of an abnormal alarm command to be described later is avoided. Therefore, even if the player plays a game for a short time without any bad feelings, the abnormality notification is not made immediately, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable due to the abnormality notification.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the fraud monitoring process (S112) which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fraud monitoring process (S112). In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 38, S112), the time during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON is counted, and when the predetermined time or longer (20 seconds or longer in this embodiment) is reached, an abnormality alarm command is set. Processing is executed.

  In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 38, S112), first, it is determined whether the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is on (S1211). If it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is on (S1211: Yes), the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1212). It is determined whether or not the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is equal to or greater than an upper limit value (in this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 20 seconds) (S1213). If it is determined that the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is less than the upper limit value (S1213: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (S1213: Yes), an abnormality alarm command is set (S1214). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  This abnormality alarm command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this abnormality alarm command, processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 or the sound output device 226 to output an abnormality alarm mode is executed. Thereby, fraud and a malfunction can be discovered at an early stage.

  In addition, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, the abnormality alarm command is set when it is set ON for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds) or more. Even if there is a period during which the game is not played with the regular gaming method for a short time (less than 20 seconds) at the time of switching of the gaming state, etc. (for example, a period for switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state) Since the abnormality alarm is not output, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined time is 20 seconds. However, the predetermined time is not limited to this, and when switching the gaming state, the predetermined time may be configured with a longer time than the necessary switching time when playing a normal game. That's fine. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormal alarm is erroneously output while the player is changing the game operation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1211 that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is off (S1211: No), processing for resetting the abnormality monitoring counter 203w to 0, which is an initial value, is executed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is determined to be off, the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is reset to the initial value, so that the process of setting the abnormality alarm command is avoided, and the normal gaming method is used. Although a game is being performed, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormal alarm is output.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1221), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 40), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1231). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1232). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1233).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1234). If it is turned on (S1234: Yes), the process proceeds to S1240. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1234: No), it is further determined whether or not information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1235). (S1235: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S1240 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1235: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1236). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1237: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1240. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1240, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1240). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1241, S1242) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1241, S1242) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S1241 and S1242) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1241, S1242), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1241), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1242). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1243.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1234: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1235: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If it is normal (S1237: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1238). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power interruption is transmitted (S1239), and the process proceeds to S1243. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1243). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S1244). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (S1250) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main process (S1250) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1250). In the main process (S1250), roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main processing (FIG. 41, S1250), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is sent to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1251).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1252). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 ends, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1253) and executed. After the process of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting process is executed (S1254). The probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when a big hit A or big hit C is executed, a game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). If it is determined that the game has entered, a process for setting data indicating that the game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability-changing game state is set in the jackpot state setting area.

  When the probability variation setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The jackpot control process (S1255) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot control process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), the opening / closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is executed. Thereafter, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display unit 83 is executed (S1258). Briefly, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and the second symbol display unit 83 Variation display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the normal winning random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251, and the processes after S1251 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260: No), the initial time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1252 (S1262).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, whereby the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). The initial value of the normal random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1259, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 39 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1263 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1259 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1251 to S1258 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1251. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1251 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S1301), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1251. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the probability variation setting process (S1254) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability variation setting process (S1254).

  In the probability variation setting process (FIG. 42, S1254), it is first determined whether or not it is the timing at which a big hit game of jackpot A or jackpot C is being executed (S1261). If it is determined that it is not the timing at which the jackpot A or jackpot C is being executed (S1261: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing when the big hit A or the big hit C is being executed, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second specific entrance 650a (S1262). When it is determined that a game ball has entered the second specific entrance 650a (S1262: Yes), setting data for probability variation is set in the big hit state area 203m (S1263). Thereafter, a ball entry notification command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the ball has entered the second specific ball inlet 650a is set (S1264). In this case, in the big hit state area 203m, in the default setting, the short-time gaming state is set, and data for setting the probability changing gaming state when the gaming ball enters the second specific entrance 650a. To be rewritten. When the probability variation gaming state is set, it is automatically rewritten to the default short-time gaming state data.

  As a result, when a game ball does not enter the second specific entrance 650a, the short-time game state is automatically set after the big hit game regardless of the big hit main player. The load can be reduced.

  As will be described later, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the entry notification command, the third symbol display device 81 or the sound output device 226 outputs a notification mode for notifying that the probability variation gaming state is given. To be controlled. Thereby, it is easy to understand for the player, and the gaming state after the jackpot game can be notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the big hit control process (S1255) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1255).

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 43, S1255), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1271). If it is determined in the process of S1271 that the special symbol jackpot is started (S1271: Yes), the value of the round number counter is set to 0 (S1272), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1271 that the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1271: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1273). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1273, if the special symbol is not being jackpoted (S1273: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1273, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1273: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1274). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1274: Yes), the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a is opened (S1275), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set ( S1276), 1 is added to the value of the round number counter (S1277). After adding 1 to the value of the round number counter, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1251) of the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) executed by the MPU 201 It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, when a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is received, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1274 (S1274: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a is satisfied (S1278). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, or the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls has won after opening.

  In the processing of S1278, when the closing condition of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a is satisfied (S1278: Yes), the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a is closed ( S1279) and the process proceeds to S1280. In the process of S1280, it is determined whether it is the final round (S1280). If it is not the last round in the process of S1280 (S1280: No), this process is terminated. In the process of S1280, if it is the final round (S1280: Yes), the end of jackpot is set (S1281), and based on the gaming state set in the jackpot after-state area 203m, the state setting area 203u and the hour / short counter 203k Are set (S1282). In the process of S1282, if the gaming state set in the big hit state area 203m is the hour / short gaming state, 100 is set as the value of the hour / hour counter 203k. Thereby, after shifting to a time saving game state, time saving games can be awarded 100 times.

  Next, a status command corresponding to the status area 203u is set (S1283), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1278, when the closing condition for the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a is not satisfied (S1278: No), this processing is ended as it is.

<Regarding the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is broadly classified into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process (S1400) that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1418 (see FIG. 45) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 45, S1415), it executes the power-off process of S1418. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1418 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1418, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1418, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is executed (see S1417 in FIG. 45). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1418 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1308. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1418 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1400). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1308 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1308 is performed via the processes of S1304 to S1306. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1309 is that when the process from S1304 to S1308 is reached via the process in S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1400). When the main process (S1400) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1400) was started or since the previous process of S1401 was executed ( S1401) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the processing proceeds to S1411 without performing the processing of S1402 to S1410. Whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the process of S1401 is a process related to display (production) in S1402 to S1410, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S1411 and the command determination process of S1412 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1402). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1409 described later are set (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the hold number display update process (S1406), as will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k. .

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a rearrangeable period (a period during which the jackpot game and the state without a hold are omitted), the hold symbol display that is displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts the variable display. It is rearranged in order and displayed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1408), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1411, a command determination process that performs a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed (S1411). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. For this purpose, the variable display setting process which is a process to be set is executed (S1412). Details of the variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the fluctuation display setting process (S1412), a fluctuation update process is executed (S1413). Details of the fluctuation update process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the fluctuation update process (S1413), a probability change period notification process is executed (S1414). The details of this probability change period notification process (the process according to the command received from the main controller 110 in S1414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1414 ends, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1417), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process (S1400) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process (S1400) is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a command determination process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1411). This command determination process (S1411) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Determine. Details of the command determination process (S1411) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1411), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S1501). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1501: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command (S1503). The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S1412) described later. It is used when setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command to notify the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1504). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1504: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. This is used when setting the second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1507). When it is determined that the first or second stop type command is received (S1507: Yes), when the first stop type command is received, the first stop type selection flag is set to ON. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to ON. (S1508). From the received first stop type command or second stop type command, the stop type (either 15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot) is extracted (S1509). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Are stored in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1510). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is an audio lamp The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d1 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113 (S1511).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 (start winning). Through the processing of S1508, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d1 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223d1 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or, even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when a start winning is detected. Then, it can be set to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S1512). When it is determined that a winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), information on each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203t of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1513). Here, the information of each holding area in the extracted sorting holding storage area 203t is the determination result of each holding, the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern type, the fluctuation display order, and the time until the fluctuation display starts. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command or a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515: Yes), when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received, the secondary special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is received. Is turned on and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command 223d2 is turned on (S1516).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variable stop command or the special figure 2 variable stop command has not been received (S1515: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S1517). If it is determined that a status command is received (S1517: Yes), a status corresponding to the received command is set in the secondary status setting area 223h (S1518).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a status command has not been received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the hold number display update process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the hold number display update process (S1406). This hold number display update process (S1406) is a process for updating the hold symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each hold area of the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k. .

  In the hold number display update process (FIG. 47, S1406), first, the change display start time of the change start time storage area 223k5 of each hold area of the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k is updated (S1601). The execution period of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be performed by another method.

  The reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area where the reordering flag 223k7 of the secondary reordering storage area 223k is turned on is in the variable display start order, and the holding corresponding to the reserved area where the reordering flag 223k7 is turned off. In the symbol display, a display hold display command for displaying the hold symbol display in the order of establishment of the hold is generated (S1602).

  Here, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is operated by the frame button 22 during the rearrangement possible period (in this embodiment, in the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later). In the case where the hold data is stored, it is set to ON. As a result, all the displayed on-hold symbol displays are rearranged from the on-hold establishment order based on the on-hold variable display start order. On the other hand, for the newly stored suspension after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is turned on, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is off, so the order established without rearrangement, that is, the third symbol display device 81 It is displayed at the end of the reserved symbol display displayed in.

  Therefore, when the player wants to rearrange the reserved symbol display and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter In addition, the rearranged reserved symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the reserved symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (generated) hold is displayed first in the formation order. Since it is displayed at the end without being interrupted and displayed in the held symbol display, the player can suppress the confusion of the order in which the current display is displayed. Can do.

  Further, by rearranging only the reserved symbol display that is displayed when the frame button 22 is operated in this way, the change display start order can be notified only when the player wants to know.

  In general, when 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot is reached, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same start port 64, 630 as the big hit hold. Therefore, there is a case where the variable display start time is earlier in the case of the hold with the later establishment order generated at the start ports 64 and 640 different from the big hit hold. In such a case, when the symbols on hold are rearranged, the symbols on hold with a late establishment order are interrupted and displayed before the symbols on hold earlier in the formation order (on the hold symbol display area Ds1 side). The Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, if the holding symbol with the late establishment order is interrupted and displayed before the holding symbol with the early establishment order, Among the holding symbols displayed before the interrupted and displayed holding symbol, whether or not it is a big hit for the holding that occurred by winning the start opening 64, 640 different from the holding symbol displayed and interrupted You can have expectations.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, he / she thinks that there may be a big hit in the hold symbol display, and can operate the frame button in the hope that the arrangement order will change. The frame button 22 can be operated with a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1412). This variable display setting process (FIG. 48, S1412) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 48, S1412) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 14R normal jackpot), a process of setting the first or second stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 48, S1412), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is off (S1611: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1616 is performed. Execute. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is on (S1611: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is set to off (S1612).

  Next, in the process of S1613, the change pattern in the change display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 change pattern command in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1411) is displayed in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Is obtained, and the first special symbol display variation pattern command is generated (S1613). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that the first special symbol is supported, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the processing of S1613 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the command output processing (S1402) of the main processing (FIG. 45, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and the special control pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 has a variation display mode indicated by the received variation pattern command for display. The first special symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed).

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is decremented by 1, and the hold data stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k is stored in the previous hold area. Shifted (S1614). More specifically, the reserved area 1 → the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the variable display data, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3, the reserved The data in each area is shifted, such as area 5 → hold area 4, hold area 6 → hold area 5, hold area 7 → hold area 6, hold area 8 → hold area 7. Thereafter, a counter value is set in the slave figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e (S1615).

  When the processing of S1615 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1616). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is not on (that is, off) (S1616: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S1621 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1616: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off (S1617). Next, in the process of S1506 of the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1411), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Thus, a display variation pattern command for the second special symbol is generated (S1618).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1618 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 45, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and receives the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, in the display control device 114, when the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is received, the right display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81 has a variation display mode indicated by the received variation pattern command for display. The second special symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retained ball of the second special symbol) In accordance with the display setting), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d1 is decremented by 1, and the hold data stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k is stored in the previous hold area. It is shifted (S1619). More specifically, the reserved area 1 → the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the variable display data, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3, the reserved The data in each area is shifted, such as area 5 → hold area 4, hold area 6 → hold area 5, hold area 7 → hold area 6, hold area 8 → hold area 7.

  Thereafter, a counter value is set in the slave figure 2 variable time counter 223f (S1620), and the process proceeds to S1621.

  It is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) or the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON (S1621). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) and the second stop type selection flag (not shown) are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S1621: No) This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) or the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is on (S1621: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag If (not shown) is on, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to off and the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is on. The second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to OFF (S1622).

  Next, in the process of S1509 of the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1411), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or the second stop type command is set (S1623). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 is given a stop type (whether it is a 15R probability variation big hit or a 14R normal big hit) based on the stop type. A first display stop type command for notification is generated. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 determines whether the stop type (15R probability variable big hit or 14R normal big hit) based on the stop type. ) For generating a second stop type command for display (S1624). Note that the first or second stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even when the determination result is out of place. . If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

  With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed simultaneously.

  Also, a dedicated command for shifting from the main controller 110 by shifting the data in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k based on the fact that the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. It is not necessary to perform control to transmit, and the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the fluctuation update process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation update process (S1413). This fluctuation update process (FIG. 49, S1413) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, in the variation updating process (FIG. 49, S1413), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being subjected to variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the other variation display is a big hit. During the game, a process for temporarily stopping is executed.

  In the fluctuation update process (FIG. 49, S1413), first, it is determined whether or not the slave figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is set to ON (S1701). If it is determined that the secondary special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the display special figure 1 temporary fluctuation command is set (S1702). The display special figure 1 temporary variation command is a command for controlling the display control device 114 so as to temporarily stop the variable display of the first special symbol being subjected to the variation display on the third symbol display device 81. When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the display control device 114 causes the first special symbol (the left middle right main symbol) to be slightly shaken and displayed after stopping the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Then, the player is notified that the variable display is stopped. Further, by displaying the characters “the first special symbol is temporarily stopped” in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand and the variable display is temporarily stopped. It is the composition which reports.

  In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol that was being displayed in a variable state has been temporarily stopped because of a jackpot, and the lottery that was being displayed in a variable state will disappear or become invalid. You can play games with peace of mind by preventing anxiety.

  Moreover, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the configuration may be such that the first special symbol is erased from the left display area Dm and the temporary stop is informed only by characters. Of course, other configurations may be used.

  When the first temporary stop command for display is set, measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol measured in the first variation time storage area 223i is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

  With this configuration, the variation time of the first special symbol can be managed accurately, and even when the variation display is resumed, the variation display can be accurately performed with the remaining variation time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the slave figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1701: No), the value of the slave figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is 0. It is determined whether or not it is larger (S1703). When it is determined that the value of the slave figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is 0 (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1706 as it is. If it is determined that the value of the slave special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is larger than 0 (S1703: Yes), the slave special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is subtracted and updated (S1704), and the display special figure 1 is displayed. A variable time command is set (S1705). In the same manner as the first temporary stop command for display, the special display 1 change time command for display causes the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being changed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a command to control. Similar to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the temporary stop display mode.

  When the display special figure 1 variation time command is set, measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol measured in the second variation time storage area 223j is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

  With this configuration, the variation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the variation display is resumed, the variation display can be accurately performed with the remaining variation time.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1706). If it is determined that the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1706: Yes), the display special figure 2 provisional fluctuation command is set (S1707), and then this process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is not set to ON (that is, is OFF) (S1706: No), the value of the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f is 0. It is determined whether or not it is larger (S1708). When it is determined that the value of the slave figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f is 0 (S1708: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the value of the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f is larger than 0 (S1708: Yes), the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f is subtracted and updated (S1709), and the display special figure 2 is displayed. A variable time command is set (S1710), and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to select a variation pattern in accordance with the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when the main controller 110 resumes the temporarily stopped fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time or a fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time is caused by the remaining fluctuation time. You may comprise so that a fluctuation pattern may be selected. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the audio lamp control device 113 performs control so that the difference between the remaining variation time and the variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is delayed and displayed in the variation table. The variation table of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in accordance with the remaining variation time can be performed.

  Next, the probability variation period notification process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this probability change period notification process (S1414). This probability change period notification process (FIG. 50, S1414) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the probability change period notification process (FIG. 50, S1414), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state (S1801).

  If it is determined that the gaming state is not the certainty change state (S1801: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the processing of S1801 that the gaming state is a probable change state (S1801: Yes), it is then determined whether there is a jackpot B of FIG. 1 in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k (S1803). ). If it is determined that there is a jackpot B of special figure 1 in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k (S1803: Yes), the time until the stored big jackpot B of special figure 1 is started is stored. The area 223i is set (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1806.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1803, if there is no jackpot B of the special figure 1 in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k (S1803: No), the stored total fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is set in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i. (S1805), the process proceeds to S1806.

  Further, in this embodiment, by providing a rearrangeable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the rearrangement operation can be performed, and can operate the frame switch 22 at an appropriate timing. it can. In addition, the rearrangeable period is not particularly provided, and the rearrangement display may be executed if the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated.

  In the process of S1806, the value of the probability change period storage area 223j is updated (S1806), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability change period storage area 223j is greater than 0 (S1807). If it is determined in the processing of S1807 that the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j is 0 (S1807: No), it is next determined whether the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is greater than 0 (S1808). If the value of the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is larger than 0 in the processing of S1808 (S1808: Yes), the processing proceeds to S1811. If the value of the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is 0 (S1808: No), 5s is set in the probability variation period storage area (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1813.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1807 that the value of the probability change period storage area 223j is greater than 0 (S1807: Yes), it is next determined whether it is an additional opportunity (S1810). In the process of S1810, when it is determined that it is not an additional opportunity (S1810: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that it is an additional opportunity (S1810: Yes), the value of the production counter 223g is acquired, the addition time is selected (S1811), and the selected addition time is added to the value of the probability change period storage area 223j. Then, the value of the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is set as the upper limit (S1812), and the process proceeds to S813.

  In the process of S1813, a display period command corresponding to the value of the probability change period storage area 223j is set (S1813), and this process ends.

  With this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, the rearrangement can be performed only on the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The player can know the actual variation display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (the special symbol from which variation display starts). Therefore, a game can be performed while assuming a display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be performed smoothly.

  Further, in the configuration of this pachinko machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the game device can easily win the game balls alternately by the sorting device 630 in the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 64a. As a result, games are played evenly and games can be played efficiently.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the arrangement of the reserved symbols is performed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but is not limited thereto, and is performed each time a new hold is stored. Of course, you may comprise. With this configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the change display start order based on the reserved symbols rearranged in the change start order.

  In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is other than during a jackpot game or a state where there is no hold established at different start ports 63a, 63b (a state where there is no hold of one or more of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state may be set as a rearrangeable period even during a jackpot game. Conversely, the rearrangeable period is a period during which a specific variable display mode is displayed. Other than the above, it may be determined as appropriate.

  When the jackpot game is set to the rearrangeable period, the rearrangement needs to be performed in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Thus, the rearrangement order is determined, and rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. By configuring in this way, even if a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode and the display mode that has already been displayed before the hold display mode is displayed are combined. By rearranging in the correct change start order, the correct change start order can be notified to the player even in the jackpot gaming machine.

  In the present embodiment, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 are configured to store data that are rearranged. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of various data (win / fail judgment result, jackpot type, variation pattern type, etc.) necessary for the rearrangement by a winning command, The rearrangement may be performed only by the audio lamp control device 113.

  By configuring in this way, the main controller 110 backs up various data necessary for rearrangement to the RAM 203 even in the event of a power failure, and in the startup process (FIG. 32) at the time of power recovery, the various data By outputting the data to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily return from the power-off by performing the rearrangement based on the various data.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol or the first reserved symbol that has been suspended is determined based on the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has begun to vary and the variation pattern type of the data stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u. 2 The variation start time of the special symbol was calculated to calculate the variation start order. Not only that, but at the time of winning a game ball, by determining whether or not it is a variation mode that will reach, information (time information) whether or not it is a variation mode longer than a certain time is determined, and the time information and changing The variation start order may be roughly determined and rearranged from the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, at the time of winning a prize, it is determined whether or not it is a variation mode that will be reached (whether it is a long-term variation mode or a short-term variation mode), and the exact variation time (variation mode) is Even with the pachinko machine 10 determined based on information such as the number of reserved balls at the start of change, the player can be notified of the rough start order of change.

  Therefore, the player may not be in the exact change start order, but the fact that the rearrangement has been performed is included in the long-term change mode (the change mode that becomes reach) is held. , You can play games with the expectation of jackpot.

  In this embodiment, the reorderable period is determined according to the gaming state, but is not limited to this, and it is determined whether the state can be rearranged (for example, the state where the reserved symbol display is displayed). You may comprise so that it may alert | report that rearrangement is possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to flexibly set a period during which rearrangement is possible, and it is possible to give more opportunities for the player to rearrange.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S3001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S3102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S3001 in FIG. 51). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 51) (S3105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S3001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 52, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S3102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S3103 to S3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3101. The processing of S3103 to S3105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S3102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3103 to S3105 without performing the processes of S3101 and S3102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, an initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3003, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3004, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S3005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 60A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S5302 in FIG. 60A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54 (b)), a power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S4108 in FIG. 53B) and simple display setting processing (see S4109 in FIG. 53B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) at the first start port 64 or the second start port 640, and the start control of the variation effect is the main control. When the device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is displayed. It can be carried out. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S3005, interrupt permission is set (S3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 53B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S4101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S4102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S4103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S4102), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S4103), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4102) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S4104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S4103) or the simple display setting process (S4109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S4105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S4106). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4105) are used. , And the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4101, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S4109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S4104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, details of the above-described command determination process (S4102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 54, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S4201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4202), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S4203).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S4204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S4205), and the processing returns to S4201.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S4205) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S4205). This variation pattern command process (S4205) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S4301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S4301 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S4303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S4303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4301, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S4304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S4306), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4301. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S4302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4304, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in step S4204 that there is no display variation pattern command (S4204: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4206). If there is a display stop type command (S4206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4207), and the process returns to S4201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S4207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process (S4207), first, stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out of reach, complete out, or chance) is indicated by the display stop type command. A stop type table is determined (S4401), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53B) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S4402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S4403), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4402 is described. In the task process (S4104) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S4402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S4403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S4402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4206 that there is no display stop type command (S4206: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4208). If there is an image change command (S4208: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S4209), and the process returns to S4201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 56A, details of the rear image change command processing (S4209) will be described. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S5303) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A, B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S4802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4801 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4802. .

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either of the back A and B is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S4802, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S4208 that there is no back image change command (S4208: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4210), and there is an error command. If (S4210: Yes), an error command process is executed (S4211), and the process returns to S4201.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S4211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S4902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4210 that there is no error command (S4210: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4212), and the processing returns to S4201.

  In the process of S4201 that is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4201: Yes). ), The processing of S4202 to S4212 is executed again. Then, the processing of S4201 to S4212 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S4201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination End the process.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S4108) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, ie, variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 55 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 55 (b)) are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 55A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, the details of the above-described display setting process (S4103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S5001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S5001: No). In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S5002 to S5004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S5001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S5002), and S5003 to S5004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S5003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S5003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S5003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S5004).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S5101).

  In the task processing (S4104), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S5101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S5102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S5004) or in the process of S5003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S5003: No), the process proceeds to S5005.

  In S5005, pointer update processing is executed (S5005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S5201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S5201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S5202). As a result, if it is End information (S5202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S5203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S5203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S5204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S5205), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S5203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S5206, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S5202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S5202: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5006). In the task processing (S4104), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S5006 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S5007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S5008). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S5008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S5008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S5009).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S5009: No), the confirmation display effect has not yet been performed and the confirmation display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S5012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S5014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S5015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S5015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S4104), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S5015 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S5009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S5016). If the demo display flag is off (S5016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5017), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S5019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S5021), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S5016, if the demo display flag is on (S5016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S4109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, the details of the transfer setting process (S4105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S5302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S5301, that is, if it is off (S5301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S5302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S5302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S5401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S5401: Yes). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S5402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S5402 that the transfer process has not ended (S5402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5402: Yes), the process proceeds to S5403. Also, as a result of the process of S5401, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S5401: No), the process proceeds to S5403.

  In the processing of S5403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S5403). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S5403: No), the determination is made. A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S5404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S5403 (S5403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S5405), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S4108 in FIG. 53B) and the simple display setting process (see S4109 in FIG. 53B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 54 to 56) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 57 to 59) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S5301: No in FIG. 60A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S5303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S4105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S5303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S5005) of the display setting process (S4103) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S5501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5502). If it is transfer data information (S5502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S5503, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S5504), and the process proceeds to step S5505.

  In the process of S5502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S5502: No), the processes of S5503 and S5504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5505. In the processing of S5505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S5505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S5506).

  In the process of S5506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S5506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S5506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5506: Yes), the process proceeds to 53507. Also, as a result of the processing of S5505, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S5505: No), the processing proceeds to S5507.

  In the process of S5507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5507). If the transfer start flag is on (S5507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S5508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S5503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S5517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5507: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S5513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S5513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S5513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S5514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S5515). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S5516), and the process proceeds to S5517.

  In the process of S5517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5517). The determination in the process of S5517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5517 (S5517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5517 (S5517: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S5518). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S5518, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S5519), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the above-described drawing process (S4106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer list (not shown) are generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4105) (S5601). That is, in the process of S5601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4104). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S5602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S5602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S5603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 53B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, a period in which an effect is executed in a normal effect mode (a normal effect period) and a period in which an effect is executed in a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode ( There are two types of periods, ie, a special performance period, and the voice lamp control device 114 determines which period is currently based on the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262. When a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, a variation pattern type corresponding to the determined production period is selected, and the third symbol display device 81 varies based on the selected variation pattern type. Pattern production is executed.

  Further, whenever it is determined by the sound lamp control device 114 that the effect period has been changed to a different effect period, a command corresponding to the effect period after the change is output to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 determines the current effect period based on the command output from the sound lamp control device 114, and selects a display data table corresponding to the round effect or the demonstration effect based on the determined effect period. To do.

  As a result, the variation pattern effect, the round effect, and the demonstration effect, which are executed in the third symbol display device 81, are executed in a normal effect mode or in a special effect mode according to the elapsed time. To do. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel a novelty each time it switches to a different production mode, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous and to improve the interest of the player in the game. .

  Moreover, in this pachinko machine 10, when the production period is determined by the audio lamp control device 114, the time is determined from the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262, and the type of the production period is switched according to the time zone. Instead, the elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired during the start-up process and the time information acquired during the elapsed time confirmation process, and the type of the production period is determined based on the elapsed time T. Yes. Thereby, even if the time information of the timing device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to aging, etc., in the hall in which the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the deviated timing information is used for the production period. Since it can be used for the determination of the type of the production period by converting it into a relative value of the elapsed time T, the influence of the shift can be reduced.

  Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the performance periods of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, some pachinko machines 10 become normal performance periods, and other pachinko machines 10 become special performance periods. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the time information acquired during the startup process based on power-on is stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262, and time keeping Since the device 262 continues to be supplied with power from the timing device power supply 263 even in the power-off state, the time information stored in the on time storage area 352b is retained even in the power-off state. When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasure switch 122 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the on time storage area storage area 352b, not the time information that the time measuring device 262 measures at the time of power on. The time information that has been stored is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 and used to determine the elapsed time T.

  Thereby, one pachinko machine 10 out of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is cut off due to reasons such as the need to replace the board due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection. Even when the state needs to be changed, the time acquisition process is performed when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off the last time by simply turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. The time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 and stored in the time-of-use storage area 352b of the timing device 262 when the power is interrupted can be stored again in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. .

  Therefore, if the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall are turned on all at once with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, then one pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. However, it is possible to determine the elapsed time T based on the time information when the power is turned on all at once by simply turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 again. Therefore, since the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period can be matched based on the same elapsed time T as other game machines, the power-off state is achieved. Only the pachinko machine 10 can suppress the timing at which the production mode is switched, and the player who is playing the game has a sense of incongruity that the production is performed in a production mode different from the other pachinko machine 10. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d for acquiring the variation pattern of the special symbol is switched depending on the gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment, a special symbol is variably displayed a predetermined number of times in the type of the variation pattern table 202d triggered by winning a small bonus different from the big bonus. Up to this point, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is configured to switch to a specific variation pattern table.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
In the electrical configuration in the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment. Specifically, a small hit random number table 202e (see FIG. 63A) and a small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63B) are added, and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d are changed. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 63A, the small hit random number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 63A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202e. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination is made for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value set in (see FIG. 63 (a)).

  In the small hit random number table 202e, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the number of small hit determination values is assigned differently for the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. In the normal gaming state, no judgment value is set. Thereby, in the normal gaming state, the determination value for the small hit is not set, and it is configured so that the small winning is not won (determined) in the normal gaming state. In the probability variation gaming state, a value of “100 to 129” is set as a small hit determination value with respect to the value of the special hit random number counter C1. That is, in the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is any one of “100 to 129”, it is determined that it is a small hit. Note that the small hit determination value is set to a value different from the determination value determined to be a big hit (in this embodiment, “0 to 9”). Therefore, when it is determined that the winning is not a big hit (not a big hit), it is determined whether it is a small hit or not.

  As will be described later, when it is determined that a small hit is made, a 2R (round) small hit is performed in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a short time (one second). The small hits are configured with a smaller number of game balls (prize balls) that the player can obtain than the big hits (big hits A to C) (because the number of rounds is small and the opening time is short). Also, the game state is not changed after the small hit game. On the other hand, after the small hit game, the variation pattern selection table 202d in which a relatively long variation time is easily selected is easily set, so that the long variation time of the first special symbol is easily selected.

  Here, in the probability variation gaming state, the lottery of the first special symbol is disadvantageous for the player compared to the lottery of the second special symbol (the jackpot B is determined and the continuation of the probability variation gaming state ends). Since it is set, the player expects to reduce the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) in the first special symbol as much as possible. Therefore, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, winning a small hit makes it easy to select the one with a long variation time of the first special symbol thereafter, thereby giving an advantageous state to the player. it can. Therefore, the player can feel advantageous even if the small number of prize balls obtained is small. As a result, it is possible to expect a small hit in addition to the big hit, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game gets bored early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63B, the small hit selection table 202f stored in the RAM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 63B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit selection table 202f. The small hit selection table 202f is a data table for determining the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d to be transferred based on the value of a transfer counter (not shown) that will be described later when winning a small hit.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the small hit is configured to be determined only by the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state. When winning the small hit, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the variation pattern to be selected when the determination result is unacceptable is deviated (probability variation). The special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d is selected. 1 (hereinafter referred to as normal table selection), any of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 (see FIGS. 64 (a) to (c)) becomes the value of the transition counter. To be determined.

  In the small hit selection table 202f, when the normal table is selected, the shift counter is shifted (probability change) with respect to “0 to 100”, and the shift transition table 1 is shifted (probability change) with respect to “101 to 150”. However, a deviation (probability change) fluctuation transition table 3 is set for each of “151 to 198”. Further, the number of transitions is set in each of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 3. The number of transitions is the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the table is set until it is automatically switched to the off (probable variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)). .

  For example, as shown in the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)), in the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (see FIG. 64 (a)), 10 times are set as the number of transitions. Therefore, if the result of the determination is wrong during the period from when the table is set until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (FIG. 64 (a) The variation pattern is selected from (see). If the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) is set, and if the determination result is wrong, this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 A variation pattern is selected from the normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63C).

  Although details will be described later, in the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time longer than that of the deviation (probability change) normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63C). It is configured to be easily selected. Here, in the present embodiment, the player who is more advantageous to the lottery with the second special symbol than the first special symbol, that is, the case where the number of lotteries with the first special symbol is reduced becomes advantageous to the player. Therefore, since the number of lotteries in the first special symbol in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be long can be reduced per unit time, the player can be in an advantageous state. Therefore, the player can be given a state that is advantageous to the player by setting the winning (probable change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 that are won in the small hit. In addition, since the number of transitions with a longer transition time can be increased when the number of transitions is larger, the number of variations of the first special symbol can be further reduced, and a state advantageous to the player is set. can do.

  When any of the out-of-range (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 is selected and a small hit is won, as shown in the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63B), a transition counter Is one of “0 to 10”, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is set. In the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4, 100 is set as the number of transitions. As will be described later, in this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 (see FIG. 65), a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time longer than that of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 is easily selected. It is configured. Therefore, the setting of the deviation (probability) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 can be in a more advantageous state for the player than the setting of the deviation (probability) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3. .

  Further, the number of transitions of the deviation (probability) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is 100, and this deviation (probability) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is set over a long period of time. In the present embodiment, the jackpot C is always determined when the jackpot is drawn in the second special symbol. Therefore, the probability variation gaming state is continuously set even after the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to be done. If the probability variation game state is continuously set, the game will continue to be set until the first special symbol fluctuates and displays up to the number set in the transition count (probability variation) special diagram 1 variation transition table 4. It is possible to subsequently set a state advantageous to the user.

  Next, referring to FIG. 63 (c), a deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d, which is one of the fluctuation pattern selection tables 202d of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 63 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d. Outgoing (probability) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d, the gaming state is the probable gaming state, the result of the determination is wrong, and any of the deviation (probability) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1-4 is set This is a table in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected when not.

  In this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)), a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds and a normal reach having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. And a super-reach variation pattern having a variation time of 90 seconds are set.

  Each variation pattern is assigned and set with the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the type of one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired at the start of variation. .

  This deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is configured such that a deviation fluctuation pattern is determined with a probability of 101/199. It should be noted that the variation time of the deviation variation pattern selected in the probability variation gaming state is 30 seconds, and the variation time of the variation variation pattern determined in the normal gaming state is 5 seconds (FIG. 11A). The fluctuation time is longer than that of (see). Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, a variation pattern having a long variation time compared to the normal gaming state is configured to be easily selected in the first special symbol, and is set to be advantageous to the player. In addition, the probability of selection is set to be lower than the fluctuation pattern of the deviation, but the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and the fluctuation pattern of super reach, which are fluctuation patterns having a longer fluctuation time, are set. Thereby, by determining a variation pattern of a longer variation time, it is possible to give a state advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, the player is given a probable variation gaming state for a long period of time).

  Next, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1. This deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 is set with a deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) in the probability change gaming state, and is won by a small hit. In this case, the table is selected if the value of the transition counter (not shown) is one of “0 to 100”. This deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 has 10 transition times set, and is continuously set until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times or until the game state is changed. It is configured to be.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 includes a deviation pattern composed of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds and a normal reach constituted of a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. A fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern of a super reach composed of a fluctuation time of 90 seconds, a fluctuation pattern of a long reach 1 constituted of a fluctuation time of 180 seconds, and a long reach 2 constituted of a fluctuation time of 600 seconds. Each variation pattern is set.

  In this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (see FIG. 64 (a)), the long (unchangeable) figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) was not set. A variation pattern of reach 1 and long reach 2 is set. The long reach 1 and the long reach 2 are set to have long fluctuation times of 180 seconds and 600 seconds. Therefore, since the new variation is not started in the first special symbol during the variation time, the probability variation gaming state is continued by being drawn in the second special symbol during the period. That is, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time that is out of the first special symbol can be considered as a period in which the continuation of the probability variation game is confirmed.

  Here, in the probability variation gaming state, as described in the first embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol is a deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 13 (b)), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the variation pattern is selected from the hit (probable variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 13 (c)). In the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 13B), a deviation fluctuation pattern constituted by a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds with a probability of 151/199 is selected. It is configured, and the deviation variation pattern is extremely easily selected. Further, even the variation pattern of the super reach with the longest variation time has a variation time of 20 seconds, and the probability of selection is 8/199, which is difficult to be selected as compared with other variation patterns. Therefore, if the result of determining whether or not the second special symbol is wrong in the probability variation gaming state, a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected, so that more lotteries can be made until the first special symbol varies once. Can be executed with 2 special symbols.

  Furthermore, the hold until the jackpot B is stored in the hold of the first special symbol, and the period until the lottery result is displayed (actually, the period until the variable display is started) has a high probability. It can be replaced with a period (a period during which the actual probability variation gaming state continues) in which the winning / losing lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, an effect as if the probability variation gaming state is set in a finite time is performed as shown in FIG. This effect is determined by determining the fluctuation time (the time until the fluctuation that becomes the big hit B of the first special symbol) from which the success / failure determination result of the first special symbol executed in the probability variation gaming state is out, and the time This is performed as an effect informing the player of the remaining time of the probability variation within the range. With this effect, the player can play a game with the expectation that as many jackpot games will be executed as possible by making a big hit with the second special symbol as much as possible while the probability variation gaming state remains.

  In addition, the content of the first special symbol hold memory newly stored is determined, the remaining period of the probability variation gaming state is determined, and the remaining period of the probability variation gaming state is extended within the range (FIG. 5 ( By executing b), a sense of relief can be given to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game with the expectation that the remaining period of the probability variation gaming state will be extended. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of other than the big hit, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the symbol indicating the first special symbol is a symbol string composed of two types of “O” and “X” in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81. Two columns are displayed in parallel. Even if the deviation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, “○” and “×” are repeatedly displayed at high speed alternately, and a display mode (a big hit is displayed when the fluctuation time elapses). If there is, “○” is aligned, and if not, “×” is aligned or a combination of “◯” and “×” is displayed.

  Therefore, when the player enters the probability variation gaming state, the player mainly plays the game while paying attention to the symbol indicating the second special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if the first special symbol is variably displayed for a long time, it can be prevented from being bored. Also, even if the player is not known to be more advantageous to the player as the deviation variation time of the first special symbol is longer, the effect of notifying the remaining probability change period is displayed, so that the game is easy to understand. It can be carried out.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. The symbol corresponding to the first special symbol may be displayed in the first display area Dm, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol may be displayed in the second display area Dn.

  Furthermore, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is also not as conspicuous as the second display region Dn, and is displayed in a small display area. Or you may comprise so that it may display by LED display, without displaying on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. By configuring in this way, the player's attention can be directed to the effect display in the probability variation period rather than the variation display of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress making the game feel complex. In addition, when displaying by LED display etc., for example, you may comprise so that a plurality of petals may be lighted by LED, respectively, and a determination of a success / failure may be notified by the combination of the lighting. By configuring in this way, it can be difficult to understand that the LED corresponds to the second special symbol, and the player can be concentrated on the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64 (b) to FIG. 64 (c) and FIG. 65, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 2 to 4 will be described. FIG. 64 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2. In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2, the probability of selection of a deviation is lower than that of the above-mentioned deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1, while superreach and long reach 1 This is different in that the probability of selecting the long reach 2 is increased. Further, the number of times of transition is set to 20 times, which is set to double (see FIG. 63B). That is, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64A) has a longer fluctuation time than the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64B). Since it is easy to select the changed variation pattern, the probability variation gaming state is likely to be continued for a long time, which is advantageously set for the player. Therefore, it is possible to change the magnitude of value advantageous to the player by the table selected from the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63B), and to predict which table is selected by the player. , You can expect a better table to be selected.

  FIG. 64C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3. This deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3 is set to have a lower probability of deviating and normal reach being selected than the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64 (b)). On the other hand, the super reach, the long reach 1, and the long reach 2 are set with a high probability of being selected. Furthermore, the number of transitions is set to 30 times, which is larger than the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2. That is, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3 is configured so that the probability variation period is set longer than the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2, and is set as a table advantageous to the player. Yes.

  FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4. In this deviation (probability) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4, the probability that a deviation pattern of normal deviation is selected is set lower than that of the deviation (probability) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3. The probability that the reach and the long reach 2 are selected is set high, and instead of the long reach 1, the fluctuation pattern of the long reach 3 composed of 1200 seconds, which has a longer fluctuation time than the long reach 2, is out (probability variation) It is set to be selected with a higher probability than the long reach 2 of the 1-variation transition table 3. Further, the number of transitions is set to 100 times, which is larger than the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3.

  Therefore, the deviation (probability) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is configured such that the fluctuation pattern with the longest fluctuation time is easily selected from the deviation (probability) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3. The probabilistic gaming state is configured to be easily continued for the longest time. Therefore, it is configured as the most advantageous table for the player.

  In addition, this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 wins a small hit when any of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 has been determined, and further includes a transition counter. Is selected with a probability of 0/10, that is, a probability of 11/199. Therefore, since it is determined only with a low frequency for the player, it is possible to suppress a problem that the damage on the game store side becomes excessively large. In addition, in a state where the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 are set, the player has high expectation for the small hit, and can make the player expect a success / failure determination result other than the big hit. Therefore, the malfunction which a player gets tired of a game early can be suppressed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the second embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) compared to the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. ) Is the first special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 66, S230). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) is the first special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 66, S230). It is different in that it has been changed to. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 66, the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S230) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S230).

  In the first special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 66, S230), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S311). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S312). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S312: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 ( S313). It is determined whether the value of the transition number counter (not shown) is greater than 0 (S314).

  Here, the transition number counter indicates the number of transitions (see FIG. 63 (b)) set in each table when any of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 4 is set. It is a counter for counting the number of transitions by subtracting one each time the first special symbol is variably displayed. This transition counter is set to 0, which is an initial value in the initialized state. Further, when a power interruption occurs, the count value is backed up and held for a certain period (for example, one week).

  If it is determined that the value of the transition number counter is 0 (S314: No), the process proceeds to S318. When it is determined that the value of the transition number counter is greater than 0, that is, it is determined that the transition number is set (S314: Yes), the value of the transition number counter is decremented by 1 and updated (S315). . It is determined whether or not the value of the updated transition number counter is 0 (S316). If it is determined that the value of the transition number counter is 0 (S316: Yes), the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (normal table) is set (S317). Thereafter, the process of S318 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S316 that the value of the transition number counter is greater than 0 (S316: No), the process of S318 is executed.

  In this way, when the value of the transition number counter becomes 0, the normal table is set, so that it can be switched to the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d determined by the number of transitions. Further, since the number of times of transition is set to be different depending on the set table, the player can enjoy different variation pattern effects up to different numbers of variations.

  In the process of S318, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to the reserved area 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S318). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 is executed (S319). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (FIG. 67, S319) will be described in detail later, but is set based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the gaming state, the jackpot determination of whether or not the jackpot is executed.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) is the same process as the process already described in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319) performed by MPU201 of the main controller 110 in this 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c is acquired (S421). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability changing gaming state (probability changing) (S422). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is set to ON. If it is determined that the probability change flag is on (that is, the game state is a probability change game state (probability change in progress)) (S422: Yes), the special win is based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. It is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S423). On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not probable variation)) (S422: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability time (FIG. 10 (b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S424).

  It is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203o is on (S425). Here, when the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON, it indicates that a variation that becomes a jackpot is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203o is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that the variation that becomes a big jackpot is not executed simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem in which jackpots are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the game store side becomes excessively large.

  If it is determined in the process of S425 that the big hit flag 203o is off (S425: No), it is next determined whether or not the success / failure determination result in the processes of S423 and S424 is a big win (S426). If it is a jackpot (S426: Yes), the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON for the first special symbol (S427), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (S428). Then, based on the value of the acquired hit type counter, a big hit symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S429).

  On the other hand, in the process of S425, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is on (S425: Yes), the process of S430 is executed. Further, in the process of S426, also when it is determined that the determination result in S423 and S424 is not correct (S426: No), the process of S430 is executed.

  In the process of S430, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit (S430). When it is determined that the determination result is a small hit (S430: Yes), a small hit process is executed (S431). The details of this small hitting process (S431) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68, but the value of a transfer counter (not shown) is acquired and the transfer destination table is determined based on the value. Processing is executed.

  After the process of S431 is executed, the first symbol display device 37 is set to display a symbol indicating a small hit of the first special symbol (S432). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S430, when it is determined that the determination result is not a small hit, that is, it is a disengagement (S430: No), a symbol indicating the disengagement of the first special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. It is set to display (S433). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, even if the success / failure determination result of S423 and S424 is a win, if the big hit flag 203o has already been set to ON, it is not determined as a big hit by the processing of S425, but is determined to be forcibly removed. Is done. As a result, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed at the same time as a big hit, and the big hits can be suppressed from being continued in a short time.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to be a big hit at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously big hit. You may comprise so that a fluctuation | variation may be performed. In such a configuration, in the probability variation gaming state, the actual variation period of the probability variation gaming state can be set longer by configuring a longer variation time for which the determination result of the first special symbol is a hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a small hit process (S431) which is one process in the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (FIG. 67, S319) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. ). FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting process (S431).

  In the small hit process (FIG. 68, S431), first, the value of the transition counter is acquired (S441). Here, the transition counter (not shown) is set in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and is incremented and updated by 1 each time the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) is executed. This transition counter is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 198”, and is set to the initial value “0” in the initialized state.

  When the processing of S441 is executed, based on the value of the transition counter, the transition destination table is a transition counter from the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)), and whether or not the first special symbol currently selected is determined. The selection is made based on the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d that is referred to when the determination result is out (S442). Through S442, a migration command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the type of the selected migration destination table is set (S443). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when winning a small hit, a lottery for switching the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d when the determination result of the first special symbol is wrong is executed. When the change of the variation pattern selection table 202d is determined, the change pattern selection table 202d is set for the number of transition times set. After that, when the set number of transitions is executed, a predetermined variation pattern selection table 202d (in this embodiment, a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 63C)). Can be switched to.

  As a result, when the player wins the small hit, the player can expect not only that the winning ball is obtained by the small hit game but also that the variation pattern selection table 202d is switched. Further, since the magnitude of the obtained value is different depending on the type of the changed variation pattern selection table 202d, it is possible to be interested in the type and to improve the game preference.

  In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the special symbol jackpot random number C1 that is actually acquired is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203o is already set on, that is, by the second special symbol, When the big hit is started, the setting of forcible setting is forcibly executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the big win change is not executed at the same time, and the big win change is started in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress problems that cause excessive damage.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, in the probability variation gaming state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, and the variation time of the determination result that is out of the first special symbol is set to the second special symbol. By configuring so as to have an extremely long variation time with respect to the variation time, it is configured to perform an effect of informing the variation period of the first special symbol as a period in which the probability variation gaming state continues. Moreover, when the variation | change which becomes a hit with the 1st special symbol is started, it comprised so that the variation | change of a 2nd special symbol might be started (executed) by the variation | change which becomes out of force.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, when the second special symbol is out of place, the probability of winning a small hit is set high, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol that is a small hit is set. Is configured to be able to vary even when the variation that becomes a hit in the first special symbol is started. By configuring in this way, even if the variation of the jackpot A, which shifts to the normal gaming state with the first special symbol, has been started, the bonus game is started by winning the jackpot within the variation period In addition, award balls can be given to the player to improve the interest of the player. It should be noted that illustrations and explanations of points that differ from the first embodiment will be given, and illustrations and explanations of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and detailed description are omitted.

  FIG. 69A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The ROM 202 in the third embodiment is different from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment in that the content of the variation pattern selection table 202d is changed and a small hit random number table 202e is added. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 69B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202e of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. In the present embodiment, as a determination value for performing the lottery of the special symbol, a small hit determination value that is a small hit among the determination values that are set as non-big hits is set. When the small hit determination value matches the acquired value of the first hit random number counter C1, the small hit is set as a special symbol lottery result. In the small hit game executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, an opening pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 3 seconds is executed twice. When a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the same prize ball (for example, 15 balls) as the big hit game is paid out to one player. As a result, the opening period is shorter than the jackpot game and the number of rounds (number of times of opening) is small, so the number of prize balls that the player can obtain is small, but a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than when it is off is given Is done.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), in the normal gaming state, no small hit determination value is set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state, although the small hit determination value is not set for the first special symbol, “10-109” is set as the small hit determination value for the second special symbol. Yes. Therefore, 100 of the random number values of the first random number counter C1 are set as the small hit determination value, so that it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of 1/4. Thereby, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big win, it is easy to give a small hit, and it is possible to make the player feel attractive that the lottery is drawn with the second special symbol.

  FIG. 69 (c) shows a hit (probability) special feature used to select a variation pattern when the winning / failing determination (lottery) result of the first special symbol is a win in the probability change gaming state in the third embodiment. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table. In the third embodiment, the type of variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state is different from the first embodiment. When the second special symbol is a small hit, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (c), the winning (probable change) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table is a case where the determination result of the first special symbol is a big hit and the jackpot type is a big win given the probable gaming state. Is configured such that either the variation pattern A with a variation time of 30 seconds or the variation pattern B with a variation time of 360 seconds is selected. Here, the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is set so that the variation pattern A (30 seconds) is more easily selected than the variation pattern B (360 seconds). Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 190”, the variation pattern A (30 seconds) is selected, and when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “191 to 198”. The fluctuation pattern B (360 seconds) is selected. Although details will be described later, in the case of a jackpot (bonus A) to which a probability change game is given, a shorter variation time (30 seconds or 360 seconds) than in the case of a jackpot (jackpot B) to which a probability change game to be described later is not given. ) Is set so as to be easily selected, so that it is possible to prevent the game store from being excessively disadvantaged.

  When the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win and the normal game state is given (no probability change game is given) and the type (big hit B), the fluctuation pattern C with a fluctuation time of 360 seconds and 720 seconds One of the fluctuation patterns D is selected. Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 190”, the variation pattern C (360 seconds) is selected, and when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “191 to 198”. The variation pattern D (720 seconds) is selected. Therefore, in the case of a big hit (big hit B) to which a normal game is awarded as a result of determining whether or not the first special symbol is successful, a longer variation time is set to be easier to select than when a probability variable gaming state is given. In the meantime, it is possible to give more prize balls by winning in the second special symbol.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the game ball is caused to flow down to the left flow path PA1 so that the game ball enters only the first starting port 64 which becomes the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol. Left-handed game). Therefore, even if the game ball shifts to the probability variation game state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start port 640 serving as a lottery trigger for the second special symbol rather than the first start port 64, a maximum of four hold balls are the first. It may be stored for special symbols. In this case, there is a problem in that if the player wins the jackpot that is in the normal gaming state with the first special symbol at an early stage, the player will be excessively disadvantaged. However, in the configuration of the third embodiment, even if a big hit change to the normal gaming state is started in the first special symbol, the change time is set to be relatively long (360 seconds or 720 seconds). In the meantime, a prize ball can be obtained by winning a small hit with the second special symbol. Therefore, the malfunction which becomes an excessive disadvantage with respect to a player can be suppressed.

<Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 70 to 72, the control processing in the third embodiment will be described. The control process in the third embodiment is different from the control process in the first embodiment in that the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27, S705) in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is the second special symbol jackpot determination process. 2 (FIG. 70, S705), the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 28, S706) is replaced with the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (FIG. 71, S706), and the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 70). 29, S207) is changed to the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (FIG. 72, S207). For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  First, the details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S705). The second special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S705) is different in that it is configured such that a small bonus is selected as the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S705), first, the processes of S801 to S806 are executed in the same manner as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. If it is determined in the processing of S805 that the jackpot flag 203o is off for the special figure 1 and the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot (S805: No, and S806: No) Similarly to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, the processes from S807 to S809 are executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S805 that the jackpot flag 203o is turned on for the special figure 1 (S805: Yes), a fluctuation that becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 is started. In this case, the process proceeds to S851 so that the big win is not set as the lottery result of FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is turned on for the special figure 1 (that is, when a big hit variation is started in the special figure 1), the process proceeds from S802 to S804. You may make it not perform a process (process which acquires a lottery result). Thereby, the processing load for executing the processing from S802 to S804 (processing for acquiring the lottery result) can be reduced.

  Also, in the process of S806, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S806: No), the process proceeds to S851. In the process of S851, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S851). In the process of S851, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S851: No), it is a case where the lottery result is out, so the second special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment is performed. Similarly, the process of S810 is executed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S851: Yes), the process proceeds to S852 in order to set the small win as the lottery result of FIG. Here, when the big hit of special figure 1 is started, the process is shifted to S851 so that the small win is set as the lottery result of special figure 2. In the special hit game of FIG. 2, a game ball can be awarded to the specific prize opening 65a, and a prize ball can be obtained based on the prize. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the big hit in FIG. 1 is configured to be longer (30 seconds or 360 seconds) than in the first embodiment. Therefore, even if the jackpot fluctuation of Special Figure 1 that is likely to shift to the normal gaming state after that, that is disadvantageous for the player, is started, by winning the jackpot with the second special symbol in the meantime, You can get a prize ball. Therefore, the malfunction which becomes an excessive disadvantage for a player can be suppressed.

  In the process of S852, the special figure 2 lottery result is set to a small hit (S852). Next, the small special symbol of the second special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S853), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S706) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S706). In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2, in contrast to the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern based on the small hit when the lottery result is a small bonus. However, the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S706), first, the process of S901 is executed in the same manner as the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 28). In the process of S901, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit (S901: Yes), the process from S902, S903, and S905 is performed in the same manner as the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 28). The process of S907 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is not a big win (S901: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit (S951). . In the process of S951, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S951: No), the lottery result is out of the way, so that it is the same as the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 28). , S904 is executed, and the process proceeds to S905.

  In the process of S951, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S951: Yes), a small hit variation pattern selection table (not shown) according to the gaming state is set (S952). Then, a small hit type is selected from the small hit type table (not shown) (S953), and the process proceeds to S905. When the processing from S905 to S907 is completed, this processing is terminated. Since the processing from S905 to S907 is the same as the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 28), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The small hit variation pattern selection table set by the process of S952 is a table that is specified so that a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected, although illustration is omitted. By setting the small hit variation pattern selection table (not shown) by the processing of S952, the variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is selected in the processing of S905.

  Further, the small hitting type table in the processing of S953 is a table in which only the small hitting A is defined as the small hitting type, although illustration is omitted. Thereby, in the process of S953, the small hit A is selected as the small hit type. In addition, it is not restricted to this, You may make it provide several small hits as a small hit classification. For example, a small hit A that makes it easy to win a prize ball in a small hit game and a small hit B that makes it difficult (or impossible) to win a prize ball are provided. Thereby, since the player pays attention to which small hit game is executed, the interest of the player can be improved. Of course, the selected small hit type may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Next, the details of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process 2 (S207). In the second special fluctuation stop process 2 (S207), a process for stopping the fluctuation in which the lottery result is a small hit is added to the second special fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S207), first, the processes of S1001 to S1004 are executed in the same manner as the second special fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 29). If it is determined in the processing of S1004 that the lottery result of special figure 2 for which the fluctuation time has ended is not a big win (S1004: No), then whether the lottery result of special figure 2 for which the fluctuation time has ended is a big hit It is determined whether or not (S1051). In the process of S1051, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 2 whose fluctuation time has ended is a small hit (S1051: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (S1052), The small hit start is set (S1053), and the process proceeds to S1011. By executing the process of S1053, the small hit game is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1051, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 2 whose fluctuation time has ended is not a small hit (S1051: No), the lottery result of the special figure 2 whose fluctuation time has ended is a failure. Therefore, the process of S1052 and S1053 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1011. Since the processing after S1011 is the same as the second special fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 29), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, when the second special symbol is out of play, the probability of winning a small hit is set high, and the second special symbol that is a small hit is set. The variation is configured such that it can be varied even when a variation that is a hit in the first special symbol is started. By configuring in this way, even if the variation of the jackpot A, which shifts to the normal gaming state with the first special symbol, has been started, the bonus game is started by winning the jackpot within the variation period Since a prize ball can be given to the player, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, even when the game proceeds to the probability variation gaming state, a maximum of four reserved balls may be stored for the first special symbol. In this case, there is a problem in that if the player wins the jackpot that is in the normal gaming state with the first special symbol at an early stage, the player will be excessively disadvantaged. However, in the configuration of the third embodiment, even if a big hit change for shifting to the normal gaming state is started with the first special symbol, the change time is set to be relatively long, and the small hit is given in the meantime. You can get a prize ball by winning 2 special symbols. Therefore, the malfunction which a player becomes an excessive disadvantage can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol may be interrupted (temporary stop) or canceled (forced stop). Thereby, the period until the big hit of the first special symbol occurs, that is, the period of the probability variation gaming state, can be lengthened based on the fact that the second special symbol is a small hit. Therefore, since it can be made to game in expectation that the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol will be a small hit with respect to a player, an interest of a player can be improved. Further, in this case, since the period of the probability variation gaming state can be lengthened by winning a small hit with the second special symbol, a winning ball cannot be obtained with the small hit game based on the second special symbol (or gained) The number of prize balls to be played may be reduced). Thereby, it can prevent (suppress) that an excessive loss generate | occur | produces in the game store side.

  In this embodiment, only one type of the small hit game (special type) in FIG. 2 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types may be provided. For example, a small hit A where a prize ball is obtained by a small hit game and a small hit B where a prize ball cannot be obtained (or difficult to obtain) by a small hit game may be provided. Which small hit is awarded may be determined randomly or may be determined according to the gaming state. As a result, when the player wins the lottery result, the player pays attention to whether or not a bonus hit for obtaining a prize ball is given, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  Similarly to the above-described second embodiment, when the special figure 2 is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern selection table of the special figure 1 may be switched. Further, the following may be performed. In the probability variation gaming state (high probability state of a special symbol), after a predetermined number of lotteries are executed, the state is changed (for example, the state is changed to a latent probability variation state). Then, the change pattern selection table of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) may be switched when the state is changed. For example, after a predetermined number of lotteries have been executed in the probability variation gaming state, the process shifts to the latent probability variation state, and the variation time of FIG. 1 is increased (that is, advantageous to the player), and the variation pattern selection table is switched to. To do. Alternatively, the state shifts to the latent probability changing state, and changes to the change pattern selection table in which the change time of FIG. 1 is shortened (that is, disadvantageous for the player). Thereby, it is possible to change to a state advantageous (or disadvantageous) for the player by executing a predetermined number of lotteries in the probability variation gaming state. Therefore, the variation of a game state can be increased and the interest of a player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state is configured to continue until the next jackpot occurrence, but is not limited thereto. For example, you may make it be in a probability change game state until the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (or any one) becomes a predetermined number of times. As a result, even when the big hit in the special figure 1 does not occur (for example, when an illegal act that prevents the game ball from entering the first start port 64 is being executed), the probability variation gaming state is a predetermined number of times. Since the process ends when the lottery is completed, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the occurrence of excessive damage on the amusement shop side.

  In addition, a distribution device may be provided in which the game balls flowing down the right flow path PA2 are awarded equally (or at a predetermined ratio) to the first start port 64 and the second start port 640. Thereby, in the probability variation gaming state, the game ball wins only at the second start port 640 and the game ball does not win at the first start port (that is, the big hit in FIG. 1 does not occur), the probability variation game state becomes It is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem of not being completed. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the occurrence of excessive damage on the game store side.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. The fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in the following points. In the first embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, when there is a holding ball that becomes a big hit B (usually big hit) as a lottery result of the first special symbol (that is, based on occurrence of a big hit (big hit B) of the first special symbol) When a transition is made to the normal gaming state (so-called “falling”), the period until the variation that becomes the big hit B is started is reported (effect) as the probability variation period (FIGS. 5 and 6). reference). On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, when there is a holding ball that becomes a jackpot A (probability variation jackpot) as a lottery result of the first special symbol (that is, the probability variation gaming state based on the first special symbol) Is continued (when it does not fall)), the period until the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot A is started is set as a probability change period, and it is configured to perform notification (production) in a pseudo manner. This pseudo change period that is notified in a pseudo manner is called a pseudo probability change period, and at the end of the pseudo probability change period, a revival effect that indicates that the probability change gaming state continues is executed (displayed). Thereby, even after the end of the probability variation period (probability variation gaming state) is notified, the revival effect is displayed, and the player can be expected to continue the probability variation gaming state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 73, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. 73 (a) and 73 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a restoration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the effect of informing the period (pseudo-probability variation period) until the start of a variation that becomes a jackpot A (probability variation jackpot) as the lottery result of the first special symbol is described above. In the embodiment, the third symbol is displayed in the same display manner as the effect of informing the period (probability variation period) until the start of a variation that becomes jackpot B (normal jackpot) as the lottery result of the first special symbol executed (displayed) in one embodiment. It is displayed on the display device 81 (see FIG. 5). Therefore, the player recognizes that the remaining time until the end of the probability change displayed at the top of the screen is the remaining time until the end of the probability change period in the effect of informing the pseudo probability change period.

  Then, at the end timing of the pseudo-probability change period (timing at which the change to the big hit A starts), the remaining time until the end of the probability change is displayed as 0 seconds (see FIG. 6B). Thereby, it recognizes that the fluctuation | variation to be started becomes jackpot B (normal jackpot), and will transfer to a low probability state (time-short game state) after that.

  However, the actual probability change period has not ended, and a display period command (see S6105 in FIG. 77) indicating a restoration effect is set at the end timing of the pseudo probability change period. By the display period command indicating the revival effect, the special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is reduced and displayed at the upper left part of the screen, and the characters (revival effect) “Recovery extra chance!” Are displayed in the center of the screen (see FIG. 73 (a)). Thus, it is possible to give an unexpectedness to the player by notifying the player that the probability variation period has ended, but notifying that the probability variation period will continue to be executed. Can be improved.

  After this revival effect is displayed, an effect suggesting the remaining time (addition time) of the probability variation period (or an effect suggesting the remaining time of the pseudo probability variation period) based on the memorized winning information of FIG. ) Is executed (displayed) (see FIG. 73B). Thereby, the player pays attention to the remaining time (addition time) of the probability variation period displayed after the revival effect, and the player's interest can be improved. The above-described revival effect is not limited to the end of the pseudo-probability change period, and may be configured to be displayed at the end of the probability change period. In this case, 0 seconds may be displayed as the remaining time (addition time) of the probability variation period after the revival effect.

  Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the content of the hit (probable variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table, which is one of the variation pattern selection tables 202d provided in the ROM 202, is changed with respect to the first embodiment described above. The points are different, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this hit (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table. The win (probability change) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table is a table used for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The variation pattern type is selected based on the jackpot type and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  In this hit (probable variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table, as the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result is the probability variation big hit (big hit A), the variation pattern E having a variation time of 0.5 seconds and the variation time A fluctuation pattern F of 30 seconds is defined. Further, as a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result is usually a big hit (big hit B), a variation pattern G having a variation time of 10 seconds, a variation pattern H having a variation time of 30 seconds, and a variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds. Pattern I is defined.

  These fluctuation patterns are selected in the process of S505 of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 24) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, when the lottery result is a probable big hit (big hit A) and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 190”, the fluctuation pattern E (0.5 seconds) is selected, and the fluctuation type When the value of the counter CS1 is “191 to 198”, the variation pattern F (30 seconds) is selected. When the lottery result is a normal jackpot (big hit B) and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 10”, the variation pattern G (10 seconds) is selected, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is When “11 to 150”, the variation pattern H (30 seconds) is selected, and when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “151 to 198”, the variation pattern I (60 seconds) is selected.

  Next, the RAM 223 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 in this embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a pseudo-probability variable period storage area 223p is newly provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The resurrection flag 223n indicates whether or not an effect of notifying the period (pseudo-probability change period) until the start of a change that becomes a big hit A (probability change big win) as a lottery result of the first special symbol in the probability change gaming state is executed. It is a flag for discriminating. This revival flag 223n is turned on when a notification effect of the time (pseudo-probability change period) until the big hit A in FIG. 1 is started (displayed) in the probability change period notification process 2 (FIG. 76) described later. It is set (see S6005 in FIG. 76). Then, in the period setting process (see FIG. 77), when the notification of the pseudo-probability change period is finished and the display period command indicating the revival effect for executing (displaying) the revival effect is set, it is set to OFF. (See S6106 in FIG. 77).

  The pseudo-probability change period storage area 223p is an area for storing a period (time) until the start of a change that becomes a jackpot A (probability change jackpot) as a lottery result of the first special symbol in the probability change gaming state. In the pseudo-probability changing period storage area 223p, a value indicating a time until the jackpot A in FIG. 1 is started is set in the probability changing period notifying process 2 (FIG. 76) described later (see S6006 in FIG. 76). In the period setting process (see FIG. 77), the value of the pseudo-probability changing period storage area 223p is updated (subtracted) (see S6102 in FIG. 77), and a display period command for informing the pseudo-probability changing period is set. (S6103 in FIG. 77). When the value of the pseudo-probability changing period storage area 223p becomes 0, a display period command indicating a restoration effect for executing (displaying) the restoration effect is set (see S6105 in FIG. 77).

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is the main process (see FIG. 45), compared to the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The probability variation period notification process (S1414), which is one process in (), is different from that in the probability variation period notification process 2 (S1451), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 76, the details of the probability change period notification process 2 (S1451) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the probability change period notifying process 2 (S1451). In the probability change period notifying process 2, in addition to the process of notifying the period (probability changing period) until the jackpot B in FIG. 1 is started, which is executed in the first embodiment, the jackpot A in FIG. A process for notifying a period until the start (a pseudo-probability change period) is executed.

  In the probability change period notification process 2 (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probability change game state (S6001). If it is determined in the processing of S6001 that the gaming state is not the probability variation gaming state (S6001: No), neither the probability variation period nor the pseudo probability variation period is notified, so this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S6001 that the gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state (S6001: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the resurrection flag 223n is on (S6002). In the process of S6002, when it is determined that the restoration flag 223n is on (S6002: Yes), an effect of informing the pseudo-probability change period is being executed (displayed), and an effect of informing the pseudo-probability change period. Is executed (displayed), the process proceeds to S6009.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6002, when it is determined that the restoration flag 223n is off (S6002: No), the process proceeds to S6003. In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot of Special Figure 1 in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k (S6003). In the processing of S6003, when it is determined that there is no special figure 1 big hit in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k (S6003: No), even if all the stored changes in special figure 1 are finished, the big hit B This is a case where (usually big hit) does not occur, that is, there is no transition to the normal gaming state. In this case, the stored value indicating the total variation time of FIG. 1 is set in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i (S6008), and the process proceeds to S6009. Using the value in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i set in the processing of S6008 as the upper limit value, an effect of notifying the probability variation period is executed (displayed) in a period setting process (S6009) described later.

  In the processing of S6003, when it is determined that there is a jackpot of special figure 1 in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k (S6003: Yes), the last of the stored jackpots (the winning order is the newest) It is determined whether or not the jackpot of special figure 1 is jackpot A (S6004). In the process of S6004, when it is determined that the last jackpot of the special figure 1 (the newest winning order is the newest) among the stored jackpots is the jackpot A (S6004: Yes), This is a case where the probability variation gaming state continues even after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A is executed (it does not fall into the normal gaming state). In this case, the process proceeds to S6005 in order to notify the period until the fluctuation of FIG.

  In the process of S6005, in order to be able to determine that the notification of the pseudo-probability change period is being executed, the recovery flag 223n is set to ON (S6005). Then, the time until the last jackpot A of Special Figure 1 stored (the newest winning order is the newest) is set in the pseudo-probability variable period storage area 223p (S6006), and the process proceeds to S6009. .

  In the present embodiment, the period (time) until the last jackpot A of Special Figure 1 (the newest winning order is the newest) is set and notified, but it is limited to this. is not. For example, the notification of the pseudo-probability change period ends before a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds before) when the jackpot A in FIG. 1 is started, and another effect (for example, an effect suggesting the end of the probability change period) is reached at the predetermined time. May be performed. Further, a period until a change based on the reserved ball before the big hit A in FIG. 1 (for example, one before) may be set (notified) as a pseudo-probability change period. Thereby, even after the end of the probability variation period is notified, the game can be played with the expectation that the revival effect will be displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that a resurrection effect may be displayed based on a game ball having entered into the 2nd specific prize opening 650a. As a result, the rebirth effect is displayed after it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific prize opening 650a and the probability variation gaming state is to be provided (that is, the probability variation period is extended). As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) inconsistency that the game ball does not enter the second specific prize opening 650a and the probability variation period is not extended after the revival effect is displayed. Note that the method for suppressing (preventing) the above-described inconsistency is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball does not enter the second specific prize opening 650a after the revival effect is displayed, an effect (for example, a revival failure effect) for notifying that the probability variation period is not extended is executed. It may be configured.

  In the process of S6004, if it is determined that the last jackpot of the special figure 1 (the newest winning order is the newest) among the stored jackpots is the jackpot B (S6004: No), This is a case where the probabilistic gaming state ends (falls to the normal gaming state) after the jackpot game based on the jackpot B is executed. In this case, in order to notify the period until the fluctuation of FIG. 1 as the first (the oldest winning order) jackpot B among the stored jackpots is started as the probability variation period, the process of S6007 Transition to processing.

  In the processing of S6007, the time until the first jackpot B of the special figure 1 stored (the oldest in the winning order) is started is set in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i (S6007), and the processing of S6009 Migrate to Using the value in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i set in the processing of S6007 as the upper limit value, an effect for informing the probability variation period is executed (displayed) in a period setting process (S6009) described later.

  In this embodiment, the time until the first jackpot B of the special figure 1 stored (the oldest in the winning order) is started is set in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i. It is not limited to. For example, the time until the last big jackpot B stored in the special figure 1 (starting with the newest winning order) stored may be set in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i. As a result, even if the first jackpot B of Special Figure 1 (the oldest winning order) shifts to the normal gaming state (falls), the jackpot B of Special Figure 1 (the newest winning order is the newest) thereafter Is started, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the probability variation gaming state (probability variation period) is continued. As a result, an impression that the pachinko machine 10 has a long period for which the probability variation gaming state (probability variation period) is given can be given, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  When the processing of S6002, S6006, S6007 or S6008 is finished, the period setting processing is executed (S6009), and this processing is finished.

  Next, details of the period setting process (S6009) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the period setting process (S6009). The period setting process (S6009) is a process for notifying the pseudo-probability changing period or the probability changing period set in the probability changing period notifying process 2 (S1451) described above.

  In the period setting process (S6009), first, it is determined whether or not the restoration flag 223n is on (S6101). If it is determined in the process of S6101 that the recovery flag 223n is on (S6101: Yes), the process proceeds to S6102 to notify the pseudo-probability change period.

  In the process of S6102, the value of the pseudo-probability change period storage area 223p is updated (subtracted) (S6102). Then, a display period command corresponding to the value in the pseudo-probability changing period storage area 223p is set (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6104.

  In the process of S6104, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-probability changing period storage area 223p updated (subtracted) in the process of S6102 is 0, that is, whether it is the end timing of the pseudo-probability changing period (S6104). . In the process of S6104, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-probability change period storage area 223p is greater than 0 (not 0) (S6104: No), this process is ended as it is not the end timing of the pseudo-probability change period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6104 that the value of the pseudo-probability change period storage area 223p is 0 (S6104: Yes), it is the end timing of the pseudo-probability change period, so that the end of the pseudo-probability change period is notified. Then, the process proceeds to S6105.

  In the process of S6105, a display period command indicating a restoration effect is set (S6105). Then, the restoration flag 223n is set to OFF (S6106), and this process is terminated. The display period command indicating the revival effect set in the process of S6105 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. ) Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display period command indicating the restoration effect, the display control device 114 displays the restoration effect shown in FIG. 73 on the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the revival effect may be executed after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A in FIG. Thus, the player pays attention to whether or not the revival effect is displayed until the jackpot game after the end of the probability variation period is notified, and the player's interest can be improved.

  If it is determined in the process of S6101 that the restoration flag 223n is not on (S6101: No), the value of the probability change period storage area 223j is updated (subtracted) (S6107). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change period storage area 223j is greater than 0 (S6108). In the process of S6108, if it is determined that the value of the probability change period storage area 223j is greater than 0 (S6108), then the value of the probability change period storage area 223j (the time reported as the probability change period) is an additional opportunity. Whether or not (S6109). In the processing of S6109, when a game ball enters the first start port 64 or the second start port 640, it is determined that it is an additional opportunity. Therefore, based on the game ball entering the first start port 64 or the second start port 640, the process proceeds to S6110 described later, and the remaining time of the probability change period is added (added) and displayed. Thereby, the remaining time of the probability variation period is added (added) by allowing the player to enter the game ball into the first start port 64 or the second start port 640, that is, the probability variation period is extended. The impression can be given. As a result, the player can be prompted to launch a game ball.

  If it is determined in the process of S6109 that it is not an extra opportunity (S6109: No), a display period effect command corresponding to the value of the probability change period storage area 223j updated (subtracted) in the process of S6107 is set ( S6114), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6109 that it is an additional opportunity (S6109: Yes), the process proceeds to S6110 to add the displayed probability variation period. In S6110, the addition time is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the addition time selection table 222b (S6110). Then, the addition time selected by the process of S6110 is added to the value of the probability change period storage area 223j (S6111). In the process of S6111, when the value of the probability change period storage area 223j after addition is larger than the value of the probability change upper limit value storage area 223i, the value of the probability change upper limit value storage area 223i is set as the upper limit value. Thereby, it is possible to prevent notification of a probability variation period longer than the actual probability variation period.

  In addition, although it comprised so that the probability variation period longer than an actual probability variation period might not be set (notification | reporting), it is not restricted to this, You may comprise so that the probability variation | interval period longer than an actual probability variation | change_period may be set (notification | reporting). . In this case, the subtraction time may be selected so that the probability variation period is subtracted in the process of S6110. Thereby, in addition to the case where a probability variation period is added, the case where it is subtracted can be provided and the variation of an effect can be increased, Therefore The interest of a player can be improved.

  In the process of S6108, when it is determined that the value of the probability change period storage area 223j is 0 (S6108: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the probability change upper limit storage area 223i is greater than 0 (S6112). ). In the process of S6112, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is greater than 0 (S6112: Yes), until the probability variation period actually ends (until the change to the big hit B is started). Since the period still remains, the process proceeds to S6110 in order to add and display the remaining time of the probability variation period regardless of whether or not it is an extra opportunity.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S6112 that the value of the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is 0 (S6112: No), the timing at which the probability variation period actually ends (timing at which the variation that becomes the big hit B starts) ), The display period command corresponding to the value (0) in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is set as it is (S6114), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S6114, when the display period command corresponding to the value (0) in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is set, an effect suggesting that the probability variation period has ended as shown in FIG. 6B. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, there is a holding ball that becomes a big hit A (probability big hit) as a lottery result of the first special symbol (that is, based on the first special symbol). Even when the probability variation gaming state continues (when it does not fall), the period until the variation that becomes the jackpot A is started is pseudo-notified (effect) as the probability variation period. At the end of this pseudo-probability change period, a revival effect is executed (displayed) that suggests that the probability change game state will continue. Thereby, even after the end of the probability variation period (probability variation gaming state) is notified, the revival effect is displayed, and the player can be expected to continue the probability variation gaming state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the revival effect is displayed at the end of the pseudo-probability change period. However, the revival effect may be displayed based on the game ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a. . As a result, the rebirth effect is displayed after it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific prize opening 650a and the probability variation gaming state is to be provided (that is, the probability variation period is extended). As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) inconsistency that the game ball does not enter the second specific prize opening 650a and the probability variation period is not extended after the revival effect is displayed. Note that the method for suppressing (preventing) the above-described inconsistency is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball does not enter the second specific prize opening 650a after the revival effect is displayed, an effect (for example, a revival failure effect) for notifying that the probability variation period is not extended is executed. It may be configured.

  In the present embodiment, while performing (displaying) the effect of notifying the pseudo-probability change period, the effect of notifying the pseudo-probability change period even when there is a winning that is a big hit B as the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is continued (the effect is not switched to the effect of notifying the probability variation period). Thereby, the notification of the pseudo-probability change period is finished, and the frequency at which the revival effect is executed (displayed) can be increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if there is a winning that is a big hit B as the lottery result of the first special symbol while executing (displaying) the effect of notifying the pseudo-probability change period, the probability change period is notified. You may comprise so that it may switch to production. In this case, a probability variation period (until the start of the variation that becomes the jackpot B that occurs after the jackpot A) that is longer than the pseudo probability variation period (until the start of the variation that becomes the jackpot A) is displayed as the remaining time of the probability variation period. . Accordingly, since the gaming machine in which the remaining time of the probability variation period is displayed is long, an impression that the probability variation gaming state continues for a long time can be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a case in which a period (probability variation period) in which a probability variation gaming state is informed is provided and a case in which notification is made in a pseudo manner are provided, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, you may make it provide the case where it alert | reports the period (short-term period) which is a short-time game state, and the case where it alert | reports in pseudo. Specifically, as the jackpot (may be a jackpot) type of the first special symbol, the jackpot A (which may be a jackpot A) in which the short-time gaming state is terminated, and the jackpot B (small jackpot) in which the hourly gaming state is continued B may also be provided. The period until the start of fluctuation of jackpot A (short-time gaming state is ended) is notified as a short-term period, and the period until the start of fluctuation of jackpot B (short-time gaming state is continued) is simulated The system is configured to notify as a short time period. Then, at the end of the pseudo time-short period, it may be configured to execute (display) a revival effect that suggests that the time-short game state will continue. Thereby, even after the end of the short time period (short time gaming state) is notified, the revival effect is displayed, and the player can be expected to continue the short time gaming state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, based on the small hit (or big win) fluctuation based on the second special symbol (when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation is stopped), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is configured to temporarily stop, You may comprise so that the period (temporary stop period) currently temporarily stopped may be alert | reported. Then, the temporary stop period may be notified in a pseudo manner, and the restoration effect may be executed (displayed) at the end of the temporary stop period. It should be noted that all of the temporary stop period, the short time period, and the probability change period described above may be displayed (notified) or may be displayed (informed) in combination of any two.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

<Characteristic A group> (Make it difficult to win Special Figure 1 with Electric Support)
The first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball is guided so that the game ball can easily enter the second entrance. And a movable piece movable in a second state in which a game ball is less likely to enter the second entrance than in the first state. By being moved to the first state, the flow path through which the game ball can enter the first entrance port is configured to be narrower than that in the second state. Game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first entrance and the second entrance where a game ball can enter are provided. Due to the movable change, the first state in which the game ball is guided so that the game ball can easily enter the second entrance, and the game ball is less likely to enter the second entrance than in the first state. To the second state. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the flow path through which the game ball can enter the first entrance is made narrower than in the second state. This makes it difficult to enter one of the entrances, so that it is possible to change the fun of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine A1, a first flow path in which a game ball easily enters the first entrance, and a second flow path in which the game ball enters the second entrance more easily than the first flow path. And the movable piece moves to the first state, thereby making it easier for the game ball to flow down the second flow path, and playing the first flow path than in the second state. A gaming machine A2 that regulates the flow of a ball.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first flow path for allowing game balls to easily enter the first entrance and a second flow path for allowing game balls to enter the second entrance more easily than the first flow path are provided. Yes. By moving the movable change to the first state, the game ball can easily flow down the second flow path, and the flow amount of the game ball flowing down the first flow path is regulated as compared to the case where the game ball is in the second state. . Thereby, there exists an effect that the amount of entrance to the 1st entrance can be reduced efficiently.

  In the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, whether or not the first lottery game is successful is executed based on the game ball entering the first entrance, and the game ball enters the second entrance. Based on the determination, whether or not to determine whether or not the second lottery game is successful, and based on the fact that the winning determination means determines that it is a win, the player is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. A game state determining means for determining one of the special game states, and a game state setting means for setting the normal game state or the special game state determined by the game state determination means. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first entrance by the success / failure determination means, the success determination of the first lottery game is executed, and the game ball enters the second entrance. Thus, whether or not the second lottery game is successful is executed. Based on the determination that the winning / non-winning determination means is a win, either the normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means. The normal game state or the special game state determined by the game state determination unit is set by the game state setting unit. Thereby, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that a special game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine A3, the game state setting means sets, as the special game state, a higher probability of being determined to be a hit by the success / failure determination means than in the case of the normal game state. Machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the probability setting unit determines that the special game state is determined to be a win by the state determination unit than in the normal gaming state. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the gaming state determination means determines whether the normal gaming state and the special gaming state are based on a gaming ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. Either one is determined, and the first game entrance and the second game entrance are determined so that the ratios for determining the normal game state and the special game state are different. Characteristic gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the normal gaming state based on the gaming ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance by the gaming state determining means. Or the special game state is determined, and the ratio of determining the normal game state and the special game state is determined to be different between the first entrance and the second entrance. There is an effect that a lottery can be expected to be executed at the ball outlet.

  In the gaming machine A5, the gaming state determination means determines the normal gaming state when a gaming ball enters the first entrance than when the gaming ball enters the second entrance. A gaming machine A6 that is easy to play.

  According to the gaming machine A6, when a game ball enters the first entrance, it is easier to determine the normal game state by the game state determination means than when a game ball enters the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can continue to play the special gaming state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, there is a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. And the said privilege provision means gives the privilege of a magnitude | size different by the said 1st entrance and the said 2nd entrance, The gaming machine A7 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided by the privilege providing means. Benefits of different sizes at the first entrance and the second entrance are provided by the privilege grant means. Thereby, there exists an effect that many privileges can be provided to a player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a movable determining means for determining whether or not the movable piece is movable from the second state to the first state, and the special gaming state is When set, the game machine A8 has a movable rate setting means for easily determining that the movable piece is moved from the second state to the first state by the movable determining means. .

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, it is determined whether or not the movable piece is movable from the second state to the first state by the movable determination means. When the special game state is set, it is easily set by the movable rate setting means that the movable determining means moves the movable piece from the second state to the second state. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be easily changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, an adjusting means for adjusting the firing force of the launching means based on the player's operation, and a first operation of the player A first falling area where a game ball launched with a firing force adjusted by the adjusting means flows down, and a game ball launched with a firing force adjusted by the adjusting means based on a player's second operation flows down. A game area formed with a second flow area different from the first flow area, and a game ball flowing down the first flow area is configured to be able to enter only the first entrance. The gaming machine A9 is configured such that the game balls that have flowed down in the second flow-down area are capable of entering into the first ball-entry port and the second ball-entry port, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are produced. That is, a game ball is launched by the launching means. The firing force of the launching means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the player's operation. A first falling area where a game ball fired with a firing force fired with a firing force adjusted by the adjusting means based on the first operation of the player flows down, and an adjusting means based on the second operation of the player A game area is formed with a second flow-down area in which a game ball fired with a firing force adjusted by the flow-down. The game balls that have flowed down the first downstream area are configured to be able to enter the first entrance, and the game balls that have flowed down the second downstream area enter the first entrance and the second entrance, respectively. Configured to be possible. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with fun to operate. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine A9, as the first entrance, a common first entrance where the game balls that have flowed down the first flow area or the second flow area can be entered, and the second flow A gaming machine A10, characterized in that at least a first entrance hole on one side into which only game balls that have flowed down the area can enter is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the first first entrance is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow-down area or the second flow-down area can enter. Since the entrance and at least the one-side first entrance where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow-down area can enter is arranged, there is an effect that the interest can be effectively changed depending on the game state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first entrance is disposed below the second entrance, and the movable piece is moved to the first state, so that the movable The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the passage of the game ball to the flow path capable of entering the first entrance is restricted more than in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are produced. That is, the first entrance is arranged below the second entrance. When the movable piece is moved to the first state, the passing of the game ball to the flow path where the movable piece can enter the first entrance is restricted as compared to the second state. Thereby, there exists an effect that the inflow amount of a game ball can be changed easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A11, a movable piece that sets the movable piece more easily to the second state than the normal gaming state based on the special gaming state being set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine A12 having a setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A11, based on the fact that the special gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the movable piece is set to be more than the normal gaming state by the movable setting means. Since it is set to be easily moved to the second state, it is possible to set a period that is advantageous to the player and to suppress the problem that the player gets bored.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12 has a passage through which a game ball can pass, and has a passage gate that satisfies a lottery condition when the game ball passes through the passage. In the case of two states, a common flow path that is a flow path into which a game ball can enter is formed at the passage gate or the first entrance, and is moved to the first state, The game piece is restricted from entering the first entry port by the movable piece, and a single passage is formed which is a passage through which the game ball enters the passage gate. A gaming machine A13.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the following effects are produced. That is, there is provided a passage gate that has a passage through which a game ball can pass and that satisfies a lottery condition when the game ball passes through the passage. When the movable piece is in the second state, a common flow path that is a flow path into which a game ball can enter the passage gate or the first entrance is formed. When the movable piece is moved to the first state, the movable piece is restricted by the movable piece from entering the first entrance, and a single flow path is a flow path through which the game ball enters the passage gate. It is formed. Thereby, there exists an effect that a player can play a game advantageously.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A12, the first identification information indicating the result of the first lottery game and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game are displayed simultaneously by the determination unit. A gaming machine A14 having display control means capable of being displayed on the means.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A13, the first identification information indicating the result of the first lottery game and the result of the second lottery game is shown. Since the second identification information is simultaneously displayed on the display means by the display control means, the player can efficiently play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic group B> (Produce freeze variation with time)
On the basis of establishment of the first lottery condition, whether or not the first lottery game is successful is determined. On the basis of establishment of the second lottery condition, on / off determination means for determining whether or not the second lottery game is successful and on / off determination means Display control means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means simultaneously the first identification information indicating whether the first lottery game is successful or not and second identification information indicating the result of the second lottery game. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information are respectively determined from a plurality of dynamic display periods. The player is provided with at least one of the display period determining means and the first benefit that is advantageous to the player when the determination result is correct and the second privilege that is advantageous to the player over the first benefit. Bonus determinant who decides to grant In the gaming machine having the above, the privilege determining means can determine the second privilege based on the winning of the second lottery game rather than the winning of the first lottery game, and the dynamic display A gaming machine B1 characterized by having an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, whether or not the first lottery game is successful is executed by the winner determination means based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, and whether or not the second lottery game is executed based on the establishment of the second lottery condition. Is done. First identification information indicating whether or not the first lottery game has been determined by the determination unit and second identification information indicating whether or not the second lottery game has been determined are dynamically displayed on the display unit simultaneously by the display control unit. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information are determined from the plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determination means. Each is decided. It is determined that the player is given at least one of the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege when the determination result is a win. Determined by means. Based on the winning of the second lottery game rather than the winning of the first lottery game, it is easier to determine the second privilege by the privilege determining means. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Thereby, a novel effect can be given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period determining means determines the first dynamic display period from a first dynamic display period group composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the plurality of dynamic display periods. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the second dynamic display period is determined from the configured second dynamic display period group.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the first dynamic display period is determined from the first dynamic display period group constituted by a plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining means. Since the second dynamic display period is determined from the second dynamic display period group composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods, there is an effect that a dynamic display period rich in change can be selected. .

  In the gaming machine B2, a storage means storing a plurality of first dynamic display period groups each composed of a plurality of the dynamic display periods, and one first motion based on establishment of a predetermined condition from the storage means Group determining means for determining a group of dynamic display periods, wherein the dynamic display period determining means is one first dynamic display period from the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means. A game machine B3 characterized by determining the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of first dynamic display period groups configured by a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored by the storage unit. One first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition from the storage means. One first dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means from the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means. Thereby, there exists an effect that control of a game can be performed easily.

  In the gaming machine B3, in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, the first dynamic display period configured to easily determine the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining unit. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it includes a general display period group.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups. Since the long first dynamic display period group that is easily configured is included, the number of first lottery games can be reduced from the number of second lottery games, and a game that is more advantageous to the player can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to shift to the special gaming state.

  In the gaming machine B4, the group determining means is configured to be able to determine the long first dynamic display period group based on the determination of the second privilege. Machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, the group first determining unit determines the long first dynamic display period group based on the fact that the second privilege is determined. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the effect executing means displays effect information based on the information of the second dynamic display period on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the effect information based on the information of the second dynamic display period is displayed on the display means by the effect execution means. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a normal gaming state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the success / failure determination unit is set as a normal probability, and a special probability in which the probability of being determined as a hit is higher than the normal gaming state The gaming state setting means for setting at least one of the gaming state, and the privilege determining means, the normal gaming state as one of the first privilege and the special gaming state as one of the second privilege. A gaming machine B7 that determines at least one of them.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effects are produced. That is, one of the normal gaming state in which the probability determined to be a hit by the success / failure determination unit is set as a normal probability and the special gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a hit is higher than that in the normal gaming state. It is set by the state setting means. At least one of the normal gaming state as one of the first benefits and the special gaming state as one of the second privileges is determined by the privilege determining means. Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved more.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, based on the setting of the special gaming state, the dynamic display period determining means determines the second dynamic display when determining the first dynamic display period. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that a dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period than a period can be easily determined.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, when determining the first dynamic display period based on the setting of the special gaming state, the second dynamic display period Since the dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period is more easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means, it is possible to provide an advantageous state to the player by reducing the number of first lottery games. .

  In the gaming machine B7 or B8, based on the establishment of the first lottery condition or the second lottery condition, an acquisition unit that acquires lottery information used for determination of success / failure by the success / failure determination unit, and acquired by the acquisition unit Storage means for storing lottery information, prior success determination means for executing a success / failure determination in advance before the determination of success / failure for the lottery information stored in the storage means, and the dynamic Pre-dynamic display period determining means for determining in advance the dynamic display period determined by the display period determining means, and when the special gaming state is determined, the prior dynamic display period determining means is determined. Period determining means for determining a period until the normal gaming state is set based on the determination result, and the effect executing means is determined by the period determining means. Gaming machine B9, characterized in that it is intended to execute an effect based on the information of that period.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7 or B8, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the first lottery condition or the second lottery condition, the lottery information used for the determination of success / failure by the success / failure determination unit is acquired by the acquisition unit. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Prior to the determination of whether the lottery information stored in the storage means is correct or not by the appropriateness determination means, the advance determination is executed in advance by the prior determination means. The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining unit is determined in advance by the prior dynamic display period determining unit. When the special gaming state is determined, the period until the normal gaming state is set is determined by the period determining unit based on the determination result determined by the prior dynamic display period determining unit. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the period determined by the period determining means. Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved more.

  In the gaming machine B9, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the prior win determination unit, the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination unit is determined in advance. A pre-game state determination unit for determining, and when the pre-game state determination unit determines that the normal game state is determined by the pre-game state determination unit, the normal game state is determined. The game machine B10 is characterized in that an effect is executed based on information of a period until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the advance determination unit, the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination unit is determined in advance by the prior gaming state determination unit. The When it is determined by the prior gaming state determination means that the normal gaming state is determined, the effect is executed based on information of a period until the dynamic display of the identification information for which the normal gaming state is determined ends. An effect is executed by the means. Thereby, there is an effect that a novel effect can be given to the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B9, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the prior win determination unit, the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination unit is determined in advance. In the case where it is determined that the lottery information for entering the normal gaming state is not stored, the lottery information stored in the storage unit is included. The game machine B11 is characterized in that an effect is executed based on information of a period within a period until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to is completed.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the advance determination unit, the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination unit is determined in advance by the prior gaming state determination unit. The When it is determined that the lottery information that is in the normal gaming state is not stored, the information of the period within the period until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means ends An effect is executed by the effect executing means. Thereby, there is an effect that a novel effect can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B7 to B11, the group determining means determines the long first dynamic display period group when the special gaming state is set. B12.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B7 to B11, when the special gaming state is set, the first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination unit, There is an effect that a rich production can be performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B4 to B12, the long first dynamic display period group is more easily determined by the dynamic display period determination means than the plurality of second dynamic display period groups. A gaming machine B13 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B4 to B12, the dynamic display period longer than the plurality of second dynamic display period groups is increased by the dynamic display period determining unit. Since it is configured to be easily determined from the group, there is an effect that it is easy to set a more advantageous state for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B13, state setting means for setting at least a first state in which the second lottery condition is easily established and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more difficult to be established than the first state. The gaming machine B14 is characterized in that the first privilege is configured such that the second state is more easily set than the second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B13, the following effects are produced. In other words, the state setting means sets at least a first state in which the second lottery condition is easily established and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more difficult to be established than the first state. The first privilege is configured such that the second state is more easily set than the second privilege. Thereby, it is easy to set a state advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets tired early can be suppressed.

<Characteristic C group> (Freeze effect can be selected by switching the table when hitting the probability change)
Based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, the determination of the first lottery game is executed, the determination means for executing the determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second lottery condition, and the first by the determination means Display control means capable of simultaneously displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the lottery game and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game on the display means, and the display control means dynamically Dynamic display period determining means for determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information to be displayed and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information from a plurality of dynamic display periods; After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed as a determination result indicating a win, at least one of the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is advantageous to the player over the first privilege Decide to grant either one In the gaming machine having the privilege determining means, the privilege determining means is configured such that the second identification information is displayed in the win more than the first identification information is displayed in the win. 2 It is configured to easily determine a privilege, and a plurality of first dynamic display period groups configured by a plurality of dynamic display periods are used as the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Storage means stored, and group determining means for determining one first dynamic display period group from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means, The one dynamic display period group includes a long first dynamic display period group configured so that the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period is easily determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. And the group determination means uses the determination means to specify a specific Based on where it is determined that a constant result, the gaming machine C1, wherein the length in which is configured to be able to determine a first dynamic display period group.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the determination means determines the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, and determines the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second lottery condition. The first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination means and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game are simultaneously displayed on the display means by the display control means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information are respectively determined from the plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determination means. It is determined. After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed with a determination result indicating a win, at least one of the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is advantageous to the player over the first privilege Giving either one is determined by the privilege determining means. In the case where the second identification information is displayed in the win, the second privilege is more easily determined by the privilege determination means than in the case where the first identification information is displayed in the win. As the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, a plurality of first dynamic display period groups configured by a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored by the storage means. One first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means. The plurality of first dynamic display period groups include a long first dynamic display period group configured such that the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period is easily determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. The long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means based on the determination result determined by the determination means. Thereby, a novel game property can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine C1, the dynamic display period determining means determines that the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied. When the second dynamic display start condition for determining the dynamic display period and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied, the second dynamic display period is set respectively. A gaming machine that is individually determined and has an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means. C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied, The second dynamic display period is determined when a second dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Thereby, a novel production | presentation can be performed to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the game machine C1 or C2 has a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination that the hit or the specific determination result is determined. A gaming machine C3 to play.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is based on the fact that the determination means determines that the winning or specific determination result has been determined, and the privilege game execution means Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected in addition to the hit.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a normal gaming state in which the probability determined to be a hit by the determination means is set as a normal probability, and a special probability that is higher than the normal probability is set as a special probability. A game state setting means for setting at least one of the special game state and when the second privilege is determined, the special game state is set as one of the second privilege by the game state setting unit. Is configured to be easier to set than the first privilege.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, at least one of a normal gaming state in which the probability determined to be hit by the determining means is set as a normal probability and a special gaming state set in a special probability having a higher probability of being determined to be hit than the normal probability Is set by the game state setting means. When the second privilege is determined, the special gaming state is configured more easily than the first privilege by the gaming state setting means as one of the second privileges. Thereby, a gaming state advantageous to the player can be set more. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine C4, it is determined that the specific determination result is determined by the determination means when the special gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, when the special gaming state is set, the determination means determines that the determination result is a specific determination result, so that the value of the special gaming state can be further increased. There is an effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the plurality of first dynamic display period groups include the first dynamic display period having a dynamic display period longer than the long first dynamic display period group. A special-length first dynamic display period group configured to be easily determined by the automatic display period determination means, and the group determination means determines the long first dynamic display period group, The gaming machine C6 is configured to be able to determine the special-length first dynamic display period group when the specific determination is executed by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are produced. That is, the plurality of first dynamic display period groups are configured such that the first dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period than the long first dynamic display period group is easily determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. A special length first dynamic display period group is included. When the long first dynamic display period group is determined and the determination unit performs a specific determination, the special length first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination unit. Thereby, the value of becoming a specific determination result can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that a specific determination result can be expected in addition to the win.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the group determining means determines the first dynamic display predetermined based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied after determining the long first dynamic display period group. A gaming machine C7, which determines a period group.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, after the long first dynamic display period group is determined, the predetermined condition is satisfied and then predetermined by the group determining means. Since the determined first dynamic display period group is determined, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the second lottery condition is satisfied and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more easily established than the first state. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the first privilege is configured such that the first state is more easily set by the state setting means than the second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the following effects are produced. That is, the first state where the second lottery condition is satisfied and the second state where the second lottery condition is more easily satisfied than the first state are set by the state setting means. The first privilege is configured such that the first state is more easily set by the state setting means than the second privilege. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (When the normal hit is started in the special figure 1, the bonus is increased by the small hit)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, the first determination is executed, the determination means for executing the second determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, and the first determination result of the first determination by the determination means Display control means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means simultaneously the first identification information to be displayed and the second identification information indicating the second discrimination result of the second discrimination, and dynamically displayed by the display control means. Dynamic display period determining means for determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information from a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the first determination result Alternatively, when the second determination result is the specific first determination result or the second determination result, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is advantageous to the player over the first privilege and Decided to give the player at least one of In the gaming machine having the privilege determining means to perform, a dynamic display in which first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is displayed and a second indicating the specific second determination result Dynamic display restriction means for restricting simultaneous dynamic display of identification information and dynamic display, and when the determination means determines that it is not the specific second determination result, the second privilege Special determination means for determining the establishment of a special second determination result that gives a special privilege different from the above, and the second identification information indicating that the formation of the special second determination result is determined by the special determination means. A game machine D1 having special dynamic display means for displaying a target.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, a special symbol winning lottery is performed and a dynamic display for notifying the lottery result is displayed on the display device. Executed in Also, there is a configuration in which a plurality of start ports are provided and dynamic display based on special symbols corresponding to each start port can be executed simultaneously. In such a configuration, when a lottery based on one of the special symbols is won, the dynamic display based on the other special symbols is interrupted (or stopped), so that any special symbol is won. There has been proposed a gaming machine configured to make it easy to understand (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). In this case, when the lottery result of one special symbol is won, the dynamic display based on the other special symbols is interrupted (or stopped). Thereby, the lottery opportunity based on the special symbol to which a privilege advantageous for the player is given is reduced, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is lowered. An object of the present technical feature is to provide a gaming machine that improves the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition. The first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the determination unit and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination are dynamically displayed on the display unit by the display control unit. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information are respectively determined by the dynamic display period determination means from a plurality of dynamic display periods. It is determined. The first privilege that is advantageous to the player when the first determination result or the second determination result is the specific first determination result or the second determination result, and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege It is determined by the privilege determining means that at least one of the above is given to the player.

  The dynamic display in which the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is displayed and the dynamic display in which the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed are simultaneously dynamic. The display is regulated by the dynamic display regulation means. When it is determined by the determination means that the result is not the specific second determination result, the special determination means determines that a special second determination result that gives a special privilege different from the second privilege is established. Second identification information indicating that the establishment of the special second determination result is determined by the special determination means is dynamically displayed by the special dynamic display means.

  Thereby, even if the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is already dynamically displayed, the second identification information indicating the special second determination result can be displayed on the display unit at the same time. Therefore, the special privilege can be efficiently given to the player. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first state, and the variable entry means When a game ball enters the game, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and the variable pitching means in the first state until a predetermined condition is established as the first privilege or the second privilege. The game includes a variable award game and a special game execution means for executing the special bonus game in which the variable pitching means is changed to the first state in a short period of time following the bonus game as the special bonus. A gaming machine D2 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1, as a special privilege, the variable entry means is changed to the first state in a short period of time following the privilege game executed by the first privilege or the second privilege. Therefore, the privilege below the privilege obtained by the 1st privilege or the 2nd privilege can be given to the player as a special privilege, and the privilege obtained by the player is increased while suppressing the gambling property from becoming too high. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D2, the special gaming state in which the probability that the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is determined higher than normal is set higher, the specific first determination result or the specific determination result Probability setting means for setting at least one of a normal game state in which the probability of determining the second determination result is set to the normal probability is set, and in the second privilege, the special game state after the privilege game Is set by the probability setting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D2, in the second privilege, since the special gaming state is set after the bonus game, the second privilege is made more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. There is an effect that the game can be performed by making the player expect whether the first privilege or the second privilege is granted.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the privilege determining means is configured to easily give the first privilege when it is the specific first determination result than when it is the specific second determination result. A gaming machine D4, which is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 can be expected to have a specific second determination result, and the game can be expected to satisfy the second condition. There is an effect that can be performed.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, when the normal gaming state is set, the first condition is configured more easily than the second condition, and when the special gaming state is set, The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the second condition is more easily established than the first condition.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second condition is easily established by entering the special gaming state, so that the second privilege is given compared to the normal gaming state. There is an effect that the second privilege can be easily given to the player continuously.

  In the gaming machine D5, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and an opening that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entry means easily. A gaming machine D6, characterized by having a state and variable means that can be changed to a restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted more than the opened state.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, there is an effect that the entrance rate to the second entrance means can be easily changed.

  In the gaming machine D6, the first flow path through which the game ball flows down, the second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow, and the first flow path based on the operation of the player Launching means capable of launching a game ball by switching to each of the second flow paths, the first ball entry means being disposed in the first flow path, A gaming machine D7, wherein the first entry means and the second entry means are respectively arranged.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D6, when the game ball is inserted into the second ball entry means to play the game, the game ball is also entered into the first ball entry means. Thus, there is an effect that the opportunity to dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information at the same time can be increased. In addition, in the 1st identification information, since a 1st privilege is easy to be provided, the malfunction which a 2nd privilege is continuously provided can be suppressed. Furthermore, the first identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the player wishes that the specific first determination result is not displayed with the first identification information, and the specific second determination result is displayed with the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D7, the first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path is configured to make it difficult for a game ball to enter than the first ball entry means arranged in the first flow path. When the normal gaming state is set, the game ball is configured to enter the first ball entry means arranged in the first flow path more easily than the second ball entry means, When the special game state is set, the variable means is set to be easily changed to the open state than in the normal game state, so that the first channel disposed in the first flow path is set. A gaming machine D8, characterized in that a game ball is easier to enter the second entrance means than the first entrance means.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D7, it is possible to switch the flow path for the player to flow down the game ball between the normal gaming state and the special gaming state, thereby changing the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic E group> (Revival production of the probability variation period)
The first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, the determination means for executing the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination result of the first determination by the determination means is shown. Display control means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information and second identification information indicating a second discrimination result of the second discrimination simultaneously on a display means, and the dynamic display by the display control means A dynamic display period determining unit that determines a first dynamic display period of the first identification information and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information from a plurality of dynamic display periods; A probability setting means for setting one of a high probability state having a higher probability than the normal time and a low probability state being the normal probability lower than the high probability state, and the dynamic display period determining means Information on the determined first dynamic display period And an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the probability setting means, wherein the probability setting means determines the low probability state based on the fact that the first setting condition is satisfied when the specific first determination result is obtained. And setting the high probability state based on the establishment of the second setting condition, and the effect executing means executes the specific effect when the specific first determination result is determined. A gaming machine E1 characterized by that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, whether or not the game is successful is lottery, and a dynamic display of a special symbol notifying the lottery result is displayed on the display device. Executed in If the lottery result is a win, after a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the probability of being determined to be a win is a normal normal probability game state, and the probability of being determined to be a win is high. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which any one of the probabilistic gaming states is set (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, the player pays attention to whether or not the high probability gaming state is continuously set after the privilege game is executed in the high probability gaming state. Therefore, in the production related to whether or not the high probability gaming state is continued, further improvement of interest has been demanded. In this technical feature, it aims at providing the gaming machine which can improve interest.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the specific first determination result is determined, the low probability state or the high probability state is set by the probability setting means, so that by executing the specific effect by the effect executing means, the probability Can be notified in advance that there is a possibility that the game will be changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, the specific effect includes an effect suggested based on the first setting condition or the second setting condition that establishes which of the low probability state and the high probability game state is set. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being a waste.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, there is an effect that it is possible to predict whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state early due to a specific effect.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means is at least the first condition or the first Storage means that is stored until two conditions are satisfied; prior determination means that determines the information stored in the storage means before the first condition or the second condition is satisfied; and the prior determination Pre-period determining means for determining in advance the first dynamic display period or the second dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the determination result of the means, The effect executed by the effect execution means includes period information corresponding to the first dynamic display period determined by the prior period determination means. 3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first identification is performed by performing an effect including period information corresponding to the first dynamic display period determined by the prior period determination unit. It is possible to inform the player of the period during which information is dynamically displayed before starting the dynamic display, and to allow the player to recognize the flow of the game at an early stage and play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes remaining period information that suggests a remaining period until the high probability state is set to shift to the low probability state. A gaming machine E4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the remaining time until the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is suggested by the effect executed by the effect executing means. Since the period information is notified, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that it is determined with high probability by the second determination. In addition, there is an effect that the period during which the high probability state is given can be easily understood.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the fact that the second setting condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a specific effect is executed based on the fact that the second setting condition is satisfied, so a high probability state is set for the player. It becomes possible to notify at the timing when it is decided to be performed, and there is an effect that a more novel effect can be performed.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, there is a precondition determining unit that can determine whether or not the second setting condition can be satisfied before starting the dynamic display of the first identification information. The effect executing means starts execution of the specific effect when the precondition determining means determines that the second setting condition can be satisfied. Machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the execution of a specific effect can be started before the second setting condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to raise the player's expectation by suggesting the establishment to the player in advance.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, and E1 to E6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, and E1 to E6, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, and E1 to E6, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine Machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies a lottery of a game when a game ball enters a start opening provided on a game board surface and notifies the lottery result. Executed in If the lottery result is a win, after a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the probability of being determined to be a win is a normal normal probability game state, and the probability of being determined to be a win is high. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which any one of the probabilistic gaming states is set (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).
By the way, in such a gaming machine, it has been required to further improve the interest of the game.
The technical idea of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further enhance the interest of the game in the above gaming machine.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 performs a first determination based on the establishment of the first condition, and a determination unit that executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition. The first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the determination means and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination can be dynamically displayed on the display means simultaneously. A display control means, a first dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, from a plurality of dynamic display periods The dynamic display period determining means to determine, and either the high probability state in which the probability determined by the determining means is higher than normal time or the low probability state which is the normal probability lower than the high probability state Probability setting means for setting the dynamic display period Effect execution means for executing an effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the determination means, and the probability setting means is configured to output a first result when the specific first determination result is obtained. The low probability state is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition, and the high probability state is set based on the establishment of the second setting condition. When one discrimination result is discriminated, a specific effect is executed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the specific performance is established as to whether the low probability state or the high probability gaming state is set. Alternatively, it includes an effect suggested based on the second setting condition.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 and 2, and information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition; The storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means until at least the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and the information stored in the storage means, the first condition or the second Prior determination means for determining before the condition is satisfied, and the first dynamic display period or the second dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result of the prior determination means Pre-period determining means for determining a display period in advance, and the effect executed by the effect executing means corresponds to the first dynamic display period determined by the prior period determining means. It is intended to include between information.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the effect executed by the effect executing means is set by shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state. It contains the remaining period information that suggests the remaining period until it is done.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination unit that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the determination unit Display control means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination simultaneously on the display means; The first dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information are respectively determined from a plurality of dynamic display periods. Probability of setting one of a display period determining means and a high probability state in which the probability determined by the determining means is higher than normal and a low probability state which is lower than the high probability state in the normal time By setting means and the dynamic display period determining means An effect executing means for executing an effect based on the information of the determined first dynamic display period, and the probability setting means has a first setting condition when the specific first determination result is obtained. Is set based on the establishment of the low probability state, and the high probability state is set based on the establishment of the second setting condition. When the is determined, a specific effect is executed. Thereby, when the specific first determination result is determined, the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the specific effect is the low probability state and the high probability. This includes a suggestion based on the first setting condition or the second setting condition that establishes which of the gaming states is set. Thereby, an effect suggesting which of the low probability state and the high probability game state is set by the specific effect is displayed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, information is acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2. Information acquisition means, storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means until at least the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and the information stored in the storage means, Prior determination means for determining before the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and the first dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result of the prior determination means A pre-period determining means for determining a period or the second dynamic display period in advance, and the effect executed by the effect executing means is the first motion determined by the pre-period determining means. It is intended to include period information corresponding to the display period. Thereby, the first dynamic display period can be determined in advance by the prior period determination unit, and the period information corresponding to the first dynamic display period can be executed by the effect execution unit. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect exerted by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the effect executed by the effect executing means is the low probability state from the high probability state. It includes the remaining period information that suggests the remaining period until the probability state is set. Thereby, the remaining period information suggesting the remaining period until the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is set is executed by the effect execution means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S305, S705 Discriminating means S505, S905 Dynamic display period determining means S506, S906 Display control means S1282 Probability setting means S6009 Production executing means

Claims (2)

Information acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and acquiring the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition;
Storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Based on the establishment of the first condition, the first determination is performed based on the first information stored in the storage unit , and based on the establishment of the second condition, the second information stored in the storage unit is used. Discrimination means for executing the second discrimination;
First display information for indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the determination means and second identification information for indicating the second determination result of the second determination are dynamically displayed on the display means simultaneously. Display control means capable of
A first dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information can be determined from a plurality of dynamic display periods, respectively. and dynamic display period determining means,
Prior determination means for determining the first information or the second information stored in the storage means before the first condition or the second condition is satisfied;
Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, prior period determination means for determining in advance the first dynamic display period or the second dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means;
Probability setting means for setting one of a high probability state higher than normal time and a low probability state that is the normal time probability lower than the high probability state, as determined by the determination means;
In the gaming machine having the execution execution means for executing the presentation based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means ,
The probability setting unit sets the low probability state based on the first set condition is satisfied when a first discrimination result of the specific, the high based on the second set condition is satisfied Set the probability state,
The effect executed by the effect executing means when the high probability state is set is determined when the pre-determining means determines that the first setting condition is satisfied. When the first effect that can identify the remaining period until the first dynamic display period corresponding to the information has passed is executed, and when it is determined by the prior determination means that the second setting condition is satisfied, A second effect capable of identifying the remaining period until the first dynamic display period corresponding to the determined first information is executed;
The gaming machine has a remaining period that is executed in the second effect after the first dynamic display period corresponding to the first information determined that the second setting condition is satisfied by the prior determination unit. A game machine that is configured to be capable of performing an effect of increasing the game. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images